GB1570244A

GB1570244A - Sewing machines

Info

Publication number: GB1570244A
Application number: GB2708/79A
Authority: GB
Original assignee: Union Special Corp
Current assignee: Union Special Corp
Priority date: 1975-07-03
Filing date: 1976-07-02
Publication date: 1980-06-25
Also published as: JPS5858119B2; JPS6248510B2; GB1570245A; GB1570243A; DE2660531C2; JPS529541A; GB1570242A; DE2660532C2; GB1570241A; GB1571736A; JPS5957690A

Description

PATENT SPECIFICATION

( 11) 1 570 244 ( 21) Application No 2708/79 ( 22) Filed 2 July 1976 ( 19) ( 62) Divided Out of No 1 571 736 ( 31) Convention Application No 592 951 ( 32) Filed 3 July 1975 in ( 33) United States of America (US) ( 44) Complete Specification published 25 June 1980 ( 51) INT CL 3 D 05 B 21/00 ( 52) Index at acceptance G 3 N 282 B 402 B ( 54) IMPROVEMENTS IN SEWING MACHINES ( 71) We, UNION SPECIAL CORPORATION, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Delaware, United States of America, of 400 North Franklin Street, Chicago, Cook County, State of Illinois 60610, United States of America, (assignee of WILLIAM PETER HERZER and ROBERT EMME Tr CULLEN), do hereby declare the invention, for which we pray that a patent may be granted to us, and the method by which it is to be performed, to be particularly described in and by the

following statement: -

Divisional 3 The present invention relates to sewing machines, and more particularly to programmed controlled automatic sewing machines.

Sewing machines having a work holder for moving a work piece through a predetermined pattern relative the machine's sewing needle are known Such machines are particularly useful when the same pattern is stitched repetitively The earliest of such automatic sewing machines are relatively complex cam controlled devices in which the entire cam apparatus must be replaced and timeconsuming adjustments must be made whenever it is desired to change a machine from one sewing pattern to another Certain of the cam controlled machines, such as those for sewing buttonholes and tacking, have no capability at all for conversion to other stitch patterns.

More recently, sewing machines have become available in which the work holder is moved according to a sequence of instructions stored in a mechanically controlled element such as a punched paper tape, cards, or a magnetic tape In such machines, the sequence of instructions in the recording medium controls the movement of the work holder during the portion of each needle cycle when the needle is out of the work piece.

Automatic sewing machines with work holders using paper or magnetic tape or cards to control their movement, however, suffer certain disadvantages First, the tape and card machines move relatively slowly from one location of stored information to the next location Accordingly, for the machine to work fast enough, a complete instruction must be placed in a single storage location Further, the complexity of the operation of the sewing machine is limited by the amount of information which can be placed in each such location A second limitation, mechanical in nature, exists since the sewing machine speed is limited by the speed at which the storage medium can be physically moved from one storage location to the next Third, a pa er or magnetic tape or card reader is relatfvely costly in comparison to cam controlled machines Further, although buffer units to enable faster operation are available, they considerably increase the expense of the system.

According to the present invention there is provided an automatic sewing machine comprising a sewing needle, a work holder for holding a work piece during sewing, driving means for moving the work holder relative to the needle, memory means having a plurality of randomly addressable storage locations holding data for positioning the work holder, address means for selecting said storage locations, means for generating a clock signal for forming a pulse train at a first frequency for sequencing said address means, and means responsive to said clock signal for forming a second pulse train at a second lower frequency for energizing the driving means.

The invention will be further described by way of example with reference to the accompanying drawings in which:Fig 1 is a side elevational view of a sewing machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, Fig 2 is a front elevational view of the sewing machine of Fig 1, I", 2 1,570,244 2 Fig 3 is a top sectional view of the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 4 is an elevational view of a pulley for driving means of the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 5 is a top plan view of the pulley of Fig 4, Pig 6 is a top sectional view of pivotal and extendable arm means of the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 7 is a sectional view taken substantially as indicated along the line 7-7 of Fig 6, Fig 8 is a sectional view taken substantially as indicated along the line 8-8 of Fig 6, Pig 9 is a fragmentary sectional view showing securement means for the driving means of the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 10 is another sectional view of the securement means for the driving means, Fig 11 is an elevational view of a limit and homing assembly for the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 12 is a top sectional view of the homing assembly of Fig 11, Fig 13 is a sectional view of the limit assembly of Fig 11, Fig 14 is a fragmentary perspective view of clamp means for the sewing machine of Fig 1, a Fig 15 is a fragmentary elevational view of reciprocating means for a sewing needle in the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 16 is an exploded perspective view of a synchronization unit for the sewing machine of Fig 1 Fig 17 is a diagrammatic view of the reciprocating means of Fig 15; Fig 18 is a fragmentary perspective view of a cabinet for the control system of the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 19 is a block diagram of the electrical signal flow paths for the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 20 is a block diagram of the central control logic for the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 21 a to 21 o are schematic views of electrical circuitry for the control system in the sewing machine of Fig 1, Fig 22 is a timing diagram of clock signals formed by the control system, Fig 23 is a further timing diagram of clock signals formed by the control system, Fig 24 is a schematic diagram of a component utilized in the electrical circuitry of Figs 21 a to 21 o, Fig 25 is a timing diagram for a machine cycle during normal operation of the sewing machine.

Figs 26 to 30 are diagrammatic views illustrating data configurations in memory means of the control system, Fig 31 is a further timing diagram of 65 signals formed by the control system, Fig 32 is a timing diagram of various signals formed by the control system, Fig 33 is a diagrammatic view illustrating various signals utilized in connection 70 with forming pulse trains for driving means, Fig 34 is a timing diagram showing the relative timing of pulse trains formed for the driving means, Figs 35 to 38 are timing diagrams illu 75 strating the relative timing of various signals utilized to form the pulse trains for the driving means, and Fig 39 is a timing diagram for operation of the machine while reciprocation of a 80 sewing needle is stopped.

Referring now to Figs 1 to 3, there is shown a program controlled sewing machine according to one embodiment of the invention having an overhanging arm 52 85 which carries mechanical power to a sewing needle 54 The work piece to be sewn (not shown) is retained by a work holder generally designated 56 which is moved in a horizontal plane by a power translation system 90 This system is driven by a pair of stepping motors 58 and 60 positioned on opposite sides of the arm 52 which supply driving power to move the work holder in two coordinate directions, termed the X and Y 95 coordinate or reference directions The power translation system acts to translate the rotary drive of the stepping motors to movement of the work holder in its two coordinate directions, with the Y coordinate 100 direction being generally aligned with the longitudinal axis of the arm 52, and with the X coordinate direction being transverse to the longitudinal axis of the arm.

The stepping motors are driven by elec 105 trical signals from electrical circuitry of the control system These signals are synchronized to the movement of the needle 54 into and out of the work piece by an electromechanical synchronization unit 62 The 110 unit 62 is connected to and driven by a hand wheel 64 of the sewing machine, and supplies synchronization signals to the electrical circuitry.

In this particular embodiment, the work 115 holder is moved in a predetermined pattern relative to the movement and position of the sewing machine needle A sequence of instructions describing the desired pattern of movement and stitching of the work holder 120 56 is stored in a storage element or memory unit having a plurality of randomly addressably storage locations The instructions may include information utilized as commands for controlling movement of the work holder 125 and reciprocation of the needle, and positional information for directing movement of the work holder relative the needle in variable distances along the two coordinate 1,570,244 1,570,244 directions Preferably, the storage element is a programmable read only memory In such devices the instructions stored in the various storage locations may be changed to describe a desired new pattern of movement The storage element may also be, for example, a randomly addressably read only memory in which the stored instructions may not be changed to describe a new pattern of movement Solid state memory elements of both types are available and are preferred.

Electrical control circuitry is provided which reads information from as many of the addressable locations of the storage element as necessary to obtain a complete instruction for each movement of the work holder It also converts each instruction into a sequence of pulses to be applied to the stepping motors, and thus drives the motors at a time when, as indicated by the synchronizing unit 62, the needle 54 is not engaged in the work piece In this manner, movement of the work holder is timed not to adversely affect the movement of the sewing needle 54.

As best shown in Fig 3, the power translating system used to transmit power from stepping motors 58 and 60 to the work holder 56 comprises two cable systems, or other suitable means, such as gears, with one being provided for each coordinate direction.

The cable systems are arranged as follows.

Pulleys 66 and 68 are attached to the shafts 70 and 72 of the stepping motors 58 and 60, respectively Cables 74 and 76 are secured around the pulleys 66 and 68, respectively, as will be described below In this manner, the rotational movement of the stepping motor shafts 70 and 72 is converted into linear movement of the cables 74 and 76.

Since both pulleys 66 and 68 and associated structure may be substantially the same, the pulley 66 will be described as representative in connection with Figs 4 and 5.

As shown, the pulleys 66 may be secured to the associated motor shaft 70 by a pair of screws 77 a and 77 b The associated cable may be wound a plurality of times, e.g, 21 to 21 rounds, in a spiral groove 82 formed in the outer surface of the pulley, with a central portion of the wound cable being received in a circumferential cutout 84 where the cable may be secured to the pulley by a screw 78.

Thus, at least part of a turn of the cable is made above the cutout 84 and part of a turn of the cable is made below the cutout.

In this manner, the appropriate cable is rigidly secured to each pulley.

Referring now to Figs 1 to 3, 6, and 7, the cable 76, which pivots the work holder about a pivot pin 108 secured to a base plate 86 of the sewing machine, is attached at both ends to the base plate 86 by a pair of hook and shoulder screws 8 & and 89 As best shown in Fig 3, portions of the cable 76 are threaded in opposite rotational directions in upper and lower grooves of a 70 free turning pulley 90 As illustrated in Figs 3, 6, and 7, the pulley 90 is rotatably mounted adjacent an end 94 of a connecting member 96 extending from a pivoting arm 92 which is pivotally mounted on the base 75 plate 86 by the pivot pin 108 Referring again to Fig 3, one turn of the cable 76 passes from the pulley 90 to the motor pulley 68, while the other turn of the cable passes from the pulley 90 to a free turning 80 pulley 98 which is pivotally mounted on the base plate 86 As shown, the cable 76 is threaded around the pulley 98 from where it passes to the motor pulley 68, such that the cable 76 is threaded around the pulleys 85 90, 98 and 68 intermediate its ends.

Since the cable ends are fixed, it will be apparent that as the stepping motor 60 rotates the motor pulley 68, the cable course between pulleys 90 and 68 will be shortened 90 or enlarged, depending upon the rotational direction of the motor shaft 72, while the cable course between the pulleys 90 and 98 will be simultaneously enlarged or shortened in an inverse manner Accordingly, if the 95 motor pulley 68 is driven by the motor in a clockwise direction, as viewed in Fig 3, the pulley 90 is moved in a direction generally toward the motor pulley 68 and away from the pulley 98 On the other hand, 100 the pulley 90 is moved in a direction generally toward the pulley 98 and away from the pulley 68 corresponding to a counterclockwise rotation of the pulley 68.

Referring now to Figs 3, 6, and 7, since 105 the pulley 90 is connected to member 96, movement of the pulley 90 is transferred to pivotal movement of the pivoting arm 92 about the pin 108 As will be seen below, the pivoting arm 92 carries with it, as it 110 pivots, an extendable arm 110 which has one end attached to the work holder 56.

Thus, as the arm 92 rotates about the pivot pin 108, so do the arm 110 and work holder 56 Accordingly, clockwise rotation of the 115 motor pulley 68, as viewed in Fig 3, results in movement of the work holder 56 toward an edge 100 of the base plate 86, which may be designated as movement in the -X direction, while the work holder is moved 120 toward an opposing edge 102 of the plate 86 corresponding to counterclockwise rotation of the pulley 68, which will be termed the +X direction.

As shown in Figs 1 to 3, 9, and 10, one 125 corner of the stepping motor 60 is pivotally mounted on the underside of the base plate 86 by suitable means, such as a bolt 104 extending through an aperture 104 a in the plate 86, a washer 104 b intermediate the 130 1,570,244 head of the bolt 104 and the plate 86, and a pair of lock nuts 104 c threaded onto the bolt 104 Two adjacent corners of the motor are slidably mounted on the base plate 86 by similar nut and bolt assemblies, as shown, with bolts 95 and 97 in the respective assemblies being received in slots 95 a and 97 a, respectively, extending through the plate 86 The opposing corner of the motor is also slidably mounted on the plate 86 by a nut and bolt assembly, with a bolt 99 in this assembly extending through a slot 99 a in the plate 86 The ends 101 of a helical spring 103, or other suitable spring means, are connected between a head of the bolt 99 and a bracket assembly 106, which is secured to the upper surface of the base plate 86, as shown The spring 103 and associated structure is arranged such that the bolt 99 will be positioned adjacent the longitudinal center of the elongated slot 99 a when the machine is at rest.

During operation of the machine, the stepping motor 60 is permitted to rotate slightly about bolt 104 with the bolts 95, 97 and 99 sliding in their associated slots, while the spring 103 applies forces to the bolt 99 and maintains continuous tension on the cable 76 through the motor pulley 68 The use of the above motor mounting structure for employment of the motor mass in dampening shocks to the cable system is set forth fully in the complete specification of our copending patent Application No 2326/76.

As shown in Figs 1 to 3, 6, and 7, one end of the cable 74, which controls radial movement of the extendable arm 110, is secured to a post 112 which depends from the arm 110 adjacent one end thereof remote the work holder 56 From the post 112, the cable 74 is threaded around a free turning pulley 114 which is pivotally mounted to the base plate 86 beneath the arm 110 by suitable means, such as a screw The cable 74 passes from the pulley 114 to the motor pulley 66 on which the cable is threaded approximately 21 turns From the motor pulley 66, the cable 74 is threaded around a free turning pulley 116, which is pivotally mounted on the base plate 86 by a screw 118, and a free turning pulley 120 which is pivotally mounted on the base plate beneath the arm 110 by suitable means, such as a screw The other end of the cable 74 passing from the pulley 120 is secured to a post 122 depending from the other end of the arm 110 adjacent the work holder 56.

As best shown in Fig 3, one corner of the stepping motor 58 is pivotally mounted beneath the base plate 86 by a nut and bolt assembly 123, in a manner similar to that described in connection with the stepping motor 60 As before, adjacent corners of the stepping motor 58 are slidably mounted beneath the base plate 86 by nut and bolt assemblies 124 and 125, while the remote motor corner is sidably mounted below the plate with a nut and bolt assembly 126.

A spring 128 has its ends connected to the 70 assembly 126 and a bracket assembly 130 which is secured to the upper surface of the base plate 86 In a manner as previously described, the spring 128 applies forces to the assembly 126, and the cable 75 74 is thereby maintained under continuous tension through the motor pulley 66.

It will be apparent that as the motor shaft rotates, the cable segment intermediate the pulley 120 and the post 122 will be 80 shortened or enlarged, depending upon the rotational direction of the shaft, while the cable segment intermediate the pulley 114 and the post 112 will be simultaneously enlarged or shortened in an inverse manner 85 Thus, as viewed in Fig 3, rotational movement of the motor pulley 66 in a clockwise direction is translated into linear movement of the cable end segments, and results in radial movement of the extendable arm 90 and work holder 56 relative the needle and pivot pin 108 toward an outer edge 132 of the base plate, which may be designated as movement in the +Y direction, while counterclockwise rotation of the motor 95 pulley 66 results in radial movement of the arm 110 and work holder 56 in a direction away from the edge 132, termed the -Y direction Accordingly, it will be seen that simultaneous energization of the X and Y 100 stepping motors 60 and 58, respectively causes simulaneous pivotal and radial movement of the work holder in the X and Y coordinate directions, respectively.

Though, at first glance, the coordinate 105 system in which the work holder moves appears to be polar, that is, a coordinate system having a radial component delivered by moving the extendable arm 110 over the pivoting arm 92, and an angular com 110 ponent delivered by rotating the pivoting arm 92 about pivot pin 108, there is built into the system means for causing the work holder to move in what closely approximates a rectangular coordinate system with 115 respect to the needle 54 This means includes apparatus whereby, when the work holder is rotated about pivot pin 108, the circular line of stitching which would normallv result from such movement is modi 120 fled to approximate a straight line of stitching such as would be created in a rectangular coordinate system This approximation of a straight line of stitching is accomplished automatically by shortening the effective 125 length of the extendable arm 110 by amounts dependent on the amount of rotational movement imparted to the work holder by the pivoting arm 92 The amount by which the effective length of the extendable arm is 130 1,570,244 shortened for a particular angular position of arm 92 is determined by ( 1) the distance from the post 122 to both the needle 54 and the pivot pin 108, ( 2) the distance from the axis about which pulley 120 rotates to the post 122 and ( 3) the radius of the pulley at the inside of its circumferential groove The pulley 120 is spaced to one side of a line between the pivot pin 108 and needle 54, a distance equal to the radius of the pulley plus one-half the thickness of the cable.

With the structure shown in the drawings, the post 122, for a fixed position of the stepping motor 58 traces a path called the involute of a circle (the circle being the inner circumference of pulley 120), and the result so to pull the post 122 radially inward more and more as the angle through which the arm 92 is rotated increases from its center position As already discussed, the amount of radially inward movement required is such as to have the needle sew along a path which approximates a straight line when only a rotational movement is imparted to the work holder by the cable 76.

As pivoting arm 92 pivots about pin 108 from its center position, the cable 74 winds or unwinds about the pulley 120, for clockwise or counterclockwise rotation, respectively As a result, for the same angular rotation of arm 92 from the center position, the compensatory effect will vary depending upon the direction of rotation from the center position In order to maintain the compensation as symmetrical as possible, it is desirable to keep the radius of the pulley 120 as small as possible, consistent with proper handling of the cable 74.

As described below, each of the stepping motors 58 and 60 has an associated homing assembly and limit assembly The homing assemblies for the stepping motors are utilized to position the work holder during a homing mode at a predetermined home location in the X and Y coordinate directions The control system automatically enters the homing mode at the beginning and at the end of a sewing operation, comprising a sequence of stitches during which the work holder is moved to the home position The home location may be preselected relative to the needle by suitable adjustment of the X and Y homing assemblies, and would normally be chosen at a position to permit full range of movement by the work holder in a stitch pattern, as permitted by the limit assemblies Since the stepping motors are utilized in an open loop condition during a sewing operation, while under program control, the homing assemblies prevent cumulative errors in reference position between consecutive sewing operations by starting each sewing operation at the same home position Since the work holder and retained work piece are positioned with extreme accuracy at the beginning and end of a sewing operation, auxiliary devices, such as slitting knives to cut buttonholes, may be utilized in conjunction with 70 the machine even when a high degree of positional accuracy is required.

The limit assemblies are utilized to confine movement of the work holder within a predetermined range of positions, and thus 75 limit movement of the work holder relative to the needle in the X and Y coordinate directions In this manner, obstruction between a clamp in the work holder and the sewing needle is prevented, which other 80 wise might result in damage to the machine and possible injury to the machine operator As will be seen below, the limit assemblies may be adjusted to vary the freedom of movement by the work holder relative to the 85 needle.

Since the homing and limit assemblies for both stepping motors may be substantially the same, only the homing and limit assemblies associated with the X stepping 90 motor 60 will be described in detail As shown in Figs 1, 2, and 11, a support plate 134 is mounted on the upper surface of a base plate 136, and a forked support bracket 138 is secured to the support plate 134 by 95 a pair of screws 140 a and 140 b which extend through slots in the plate 134 which permit slight adjustment of the bracket 138.

As shown in Fig 1, a shaft 142 is journaled by suitable bearings 144 a and 144 b in the 100 tines 146 a and 146 b of the bracket 138, with the rotatably mounted shaft 142 extending through the base plate 136, and with a pulley 148 being secured to a lower end of the shaft A pulley 150 is also secured to 105 the lower end of the motor shaft 72, and an endless belt 152 extends around the pulleys 148 and 150, such that the shaft 142 is driven by the motor shaft 72.

An X homing assembly generally desig 110 nated 154 is best described in connection with Figs 1, 2, and 12 The homing assembly 154 comprises a homing disc 156 having a notch or cutout 158 defining a radially extending edge 160 intermediate the notch 115 158 and an outer portion 162 of the disc 156, and an optical sensor 164 which is mounted on the plate 134 by a pair of bolts or screws 166 a and 1661 The shaft 142 is received in a bore 168 extending through 120 the disc 156, and the disc 156 is secured to the shaft 142 by a pair of screws 170 extending through threaded apertures in a depending portion 172 of the disc 156 to a location at the inner surface of the bore 168 125 Thus, rotational movement of the shaft 142 results in rotation of the homing disc 156.

As shown, the outer portion 162 of the disc 156 is permitted to pass between spaced tines 174 of the optical sensor 164, 130 1.570,244 one of which contains a light-emitting diode and the other an interrupter type phototransistor Accordingly, the sensor 164 detects the presence or absence of the notch 158, and generates a signal which changes state as the disc edge 160 passes through the sensor tines 174 responsive to a change of condition in light passage or interruption between the tines 174 Depending upon the rotational position of the disc 156 and disc edge 160, the output signal thus provides an indication to the control system of the present position of the edge 160 relative the sensor, and the signal may be utilized to determine the rotational direction the motor shaft 72 should be moved to drive the disc edge 160 toward the sensor When the edge passes through the sensor tines 174, a change of condition in the sensor signal indicate$ to the control system that a crossing of the edge between the sensor tines has just taken place If desired, the stepping motor could be stopped at the time of edge crossing, or, if the edge overshoots the desired alignment, the motor direction may be reversed by the control system to bring the disc into proper alignment However, in a preferred embodiment, the homing assembly is utilized in a somewhat different manner to obtain a more precise alignment of the disc edge relative to the sensor and thus the work holder relative to the needle, as described in detail below In either event, it will be apparent that the homing assembly is utilized in a closed loop manner with the control system and stepping motor to precisely position the work holder during the homing mode.

It will also be seen that the rotational position of the disc 156 and disc edge 160 may be adjusted through use of screws 170 when the disc is secured to the shaft 142.

Accordingly, depending on the angular position of the disc edge 160 relative to the shaft 142, the edge 160 may be suitably adjusted to pass through the sensor tines 174 for different rotational positions of the shaft 142, and the corresponding different positions of the work holder relative to the needle at the time of edge crossing In this manner, the home position of the work holder relative to the needle may be readily modified, as desired The operation of the Y homing assembly in conjunction with the control system and Y stepping motor for placing the work holder at its home position along the Y coordinate direction is similar to that described above for the X homing assembly.

As shown in Figs 1 and 13, the X limit assmebly generally designated 178 comprises a pair of elongated mechanical stops and 182 and an associated mechanical abutment rod 184 extending between the tines 146 a and 146 b of the support bracket 138 The shaft 142 is received in bores 186 extending through both stops 180 and 182 adjacent one of their ends, and the stops and 182 are secured to the shaft 142 by a pair of screws 188 and 190, respec 70 tively, which are received in threaded apertures 192 and 194 extending longitudinally through the stops 180 and 182, respectively, to the bores 186 Thus, the angular positions of the stops 180 and 182 relative to the 75 shaft 142 may be adjusted by placing the stops at their desired angular positions before being secured to the shaft through use of the screws 188 and 190.

As viewed in Fig 13, the shaft 142 is 80permitted to rotate in a clockwise direction untl the stop 182 engages against the rod 184 The interengaged stop 182 and rod 184 then prevent further rotation of the shaft 142 and motor shaft 72, and thus stop 85 the work holder driven by the X stepping motor at a predetermined position relative to the needle in the X direction Similarly, the shaft 142 is permitted to rotate in a counterclockwise direction until the stop 90 engages the rod 184, at which time the work holder is stopped at a predetermined position relative to the needle in the opposite X direction Thus, it will be seen that the shaft 142 is permitted to rotate through 95 an angle determined by the angular positions of the stops 180 and 182, and the work holder is permitted to move through a range of positions along the X coordinate direction, before movement of the work 100 holder is stopped.

In this manner, the limit assembly 178 limits the range of positions which may be assumed by the work holder relative to the needle to prevent a clamp in the work 105 holder from striking the needle The spaced positions at which the work holder is stopped may be modified by suitable adjustment of the angular positions of the stops 180 and 182 on the shaft 142 Such adjustment is 110 particularly desirable due to the various sizes of clamps which may be utilized to hold the workpiece on the sewing machine, and each of the clamps may require a suitable adjustment of the stops 180 and 182 depend 115 ing upon the location at which the clamps would strike the sewing needle in the X coordinate direction The Y limit assembly utilized to limit the range of positions assumable by the work holder in the Y coordin 120 ate direction is similar to that described in connection with the X limit assembly above.

As shown in Figs 1 and 2, a pulley 198 is secured to the lower end of the shaft 70 driven by the Y stepping motor 58, and an 125 endless belt 200 extends around the pulley 198 and a pulley 202 which is secured to a shaft for driving the Y limit and homing assemblies generally designated 204 As previously discussed, the Y limit and homing 130 1,570,244 assemblies are substantially identical to the X assemblies, and operate in a similar manner to obtain a home position for and limit movement of the work holder along the Y coordinate direction Accordingly, the X and Y limit and homing assemblies cooperate with the control system and the X and Y stepping motors to limit movement of the work holder throughout a range of positions and position the work holder at the preselected home location in the X and Y coordinate directions.

Referring now to Figs 6 to 8, the pivoting arm 92 has a pair of free turning rollers 210 and 212 mounted on the pivoting arm 92 by means of screws 214, and a pair of free turning rollers 216 and 218 attached to levers 220 and 222, respectively, by means of screws 224 The levers 220 and 222 are both attached to the pivoting arm 92 by a screw 226 about which they can freely pivot.

A helical spring 228 extends between ends of the levers 220 and 222, with ends of the spring 228 passing through suitable openings in the levers The spring 228 biases the levers 220 and 222 about the screw 226 and the associated rollers 216 and 218 against a longitudinal track 229, extending along one side of the extendable arm 110, in which the rollers 216 and 218 ride The rollers 210 and 212 ride in a track 230 which extends longitudinally along the other side of the extendable arm 110 Accordingly, the rollers are spring loaded against the tracks to retain the arms 92 and 110 together, and the rollers move along the respective tracks, with the extendable arm riding on the rollers and moving longitudinally relative to the pivotal arm 92.

When the extendable arm 110 reaches its furthest radial positions in the +Y and -Y directions, the posts 112 and 122 are received in the cutouts 232 and 233, respectively, formed in the pivoting arm 92 to prevent obstruction between the posts and the arm 92.

As shown, a retaining plate 231 is mounted above the base plate 86, and defines a retaining edge 234 facing toward the pivot pin 108 The pivoting arm 92 has a pair of retaining members 235 a and 235 b depending from a forward portion of the arm 92 at a location with a portion of the plate 231 adiacent the edge 234 received in grooves 236 defined in the retaining members 235 a and 235 b The members 235 c and 235 b move along the edge 234 when the arm 92 is pivoted about the pin 108, and retain the forward portions of the arms 92 and 110 at the desired vertical position relative the base plate 86 In particular, the retaining members 235 a and 235 b prevent the arms 92 and 110 from rising relative to the base plate 86 when clamp forces are applied against the work surface of the sewing machine in the region of the needle.

Assembled, the forward part of extendable arm 110, the part nearest the work holder, rides on rollers 212 and 218 while the trailing part of the arm 110 rides on 70 rollers 210 and 216 The work holder, attached to the extendable arm 110, pivots with pivoting arm 92 around pivot pin 108 by means of an opening 217 in pivoting arm 92 through which pin 108 extends As 75 previously described, pivotal movement is controlled by the cable 76, driven by stepping motor 60 The extendable arm 110 riding on the rollers 210, 212, 216, and 218 in tracks 229 and 230 moves along the pivot 80 ing arm 92 in a substantially radial direction with respect to pivot pin 108 The cable 74, driven by stepping motor 58, controls the radial movement of the extendable arm 110.

Thus, depending on the direction of motor 85 rotation, one end of the cable at the post 112 pulls while the other end of the cable at the post 122 relaxes, or vice versa In this way, there is always a positive drive to control radial movement of the extendable arm 90 The work holder 56 may comprise any suitable clamp arrangement, or other structure, to retain the fabric while being sewn.

For example, the work holder may include a lower clamp member positioned adja 95 cent the work surface of the sewing machine, and an upper clamp member which is brought into position against the lower clamp member to hold the fabric and moved away from the lower clamp member to re 100 lease the fabric, such as described in the complete specification of our UK Patent

No 1,517,297 Alternatively, the work holder may comprise operable clamp members to separately hold the fabric and 105 a label to be sewn on the fabric as will be described in the present application In either event, it will become apparent in the description of the electrical circuitry that the control system is compatible with both types 110 of clamping assemblies as well as others.

Referring now to Figs 1 to 3, and 14, there is shown a lower clamp member 238 which is positioned adjacent a work surface 242 of the sewing machine, with the lower 115 clamp member 238 having a peripherl portion 239 defining a window 241 through which the fabric is sewn As illustrated in Figs 1, 3, and 7, the lower clamp member 238 is secured to a forward end 245 of the 120 extendable arm 110 by a pair of screws 247, such that the lower surface of the clamp member 238 is located adjacent the work surface 242.

As illustrated in Figs 1 to 3, and 14, the 125 work holder also has a fabric member 240 which is brought into position against the upper surface of the lower clamp member 238 to retain the fabric between the two clamp members 238 and 240 during sewing 130 1,570,244 As shown, the fabric clamp member 240 has a pair of spaced retaining elements 243 defining a cutout 244 through which the fabric is sewn, with the elements 243 being spaced apart a distance approximately equal to the distance between the sides of the lower clamp member 238, such that the elements 243 may engage against the side peripheral portions of the lower clamp member 238 when the fabric clamp member 240 is brought into position against the lower clamp member 238 As will be seen below, the size of the cutout 244 extending from the forward end of the clamp member 240 is selected approximately equal to the size of a label to be sewn onto the fabric.

The clamp member 240 also has a tongue 246 extending upwardly from a rearward part of the clamp member, and a pin 248 projecting forwardly from a front surface 250 of the tongue 246 As shown, the clamp member 240 has a ledge 252 extending rearwardly from the tongue 246 adjacent its lower end for a purpose described below.

As best shown in Fig 2, the lower clamp member 240 is mounted in a clamp frame 254 with the tongue 246 slidably received in the frame 254 As shown, the pin 248 projects through a slot 256 in the frame, and the tongue is permitted to move in the frame between a first lower position with thep in 248 located at a lower end of the slot 256, and a second upper position with the pin 248 located at an upper end of the slot 256.

As illustrated in Figs 1 and 3, the clamping apparatus includes a forked retaining member 258 having a pair of lower tines 260 and an ear 262 extending from the lower end of each tine 260 The retaining member 258 is secured to the upper surface of the extendable arm 110 by a pair of screws 264 extending through slots 266 in the ears 262, such that adjustment of the retaining member 258 relative the longitudinal direction of the arm 110 can be made through movement of the screws 264 in the slots 266 prior to securement of the retaining member 258.

An arched locking member 268 has its rearward end 270 pivotally mounted between the tines 260 adjacent a lower end of the forked member 258 by suitable means, such as a pin 272 extending through the tines 260 and locking member 268, as shown An air cylinder 274 is also provided for actuating the locking member 268 and clamping device A rearward end 276 of the cylinder 274 is pivotally mounted between a pair of spaced ears 278 extending from an upper end of the retaining member 258 by suitable means, such as a bolt 280 extending through the ears 278 and the rearward end 276 of the cylinder The locking member 268 has a bracket 282 extendthe cylinder 274, extends through an aperture 288 in the bracket 282 where it is secured in place by suitable means, such as a nut 290 As shown, a flange 291 extending from the clamp frame 254 is secured to a 70 forward end 292 of the locking member 268 by a pair of screws 294.

Prior to a sewing operation, the pressure is reduced in the cylinder 274, and the plunger 286 is thereby retracted into the 75 cylinder In this configuration, thel ocking member 268 has been pivoted about the pin 272 to place the member 268 and associated clamp frame 254 in a raised position.

with the fabric clamp member 240 being 80 spaced from the lower clamp member 238 even though the clamp member 240 is located in its lower first position, as further described below.

As shown in Figs 1 to 3, a source of air 85 is supplied to an air cylinder 296 which is secured to the clamp frame 254, and which has a movable piston 298 engaging against the upper surface of the ledge 252 on the fabric clamp member 240 The pressurized 90 cylinder 296 urges the piston 298 against the ledge 252, and the clamp member 240 is driven to its lower first position with the pin 248 on the tongue 246 engaging against the lower part of the slot 256 which serves as 95 a stop In this configuration, the fabric clamp member 240 is spaced from an upper label clamp member 300 a distance approximately equal to the length of the slot 256, and the fabric member 240 is also spaced above 100 the lower clamp member 238, as previously noted.

Wlhen it is desired to perform a sewing operation, the operator may place the fabric on the lower clamp member 238 with the 105 portion of the fabric to be sewn positioned in the window 241 of the lower clamp member 238 Next, the operator depresses a first foot pedal of known type having a pair of separately actuatable single-pole, 110 double-throw switches, termed a Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch and a Pedal Clamp No.

2 Switch, respectively As will be discussed in connection with the control system of the present invention, both switches have a 115 normally closed contact, a normally open contact, and a common terminal connected to ground Accordingly, the normally closed contacts of the switches are connected through their respective common terminals 120 to ground prior to actuation of the switches.

When the foot pedal is depressed to a first position, the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch is actuated, such that the switch breaks contact from the normally closed contact and 125 makes contact with the normally open contact, thus connecting the normally open ing upwardly from a central portion of the member 268, and the forward threaded end 284 of a plunger 286, which is received in 130 9 1,570,244 9 contact to ground through the common terminal, while disconnecting the normally closed contact from ground.

As will be seen below, the control system utilizes the signal from the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch in the following manner When the switch is actuated and the normally open switch contact is connected to ground, the system generates a signal which results in supply of a moderate amount of air pressure from an air source to the air cylinder 274.

In turn, the plunger 286 is partially driven from the cylinder 274, thus lowering the locking member 268 and the fabric clamp member 240 to a position against the lower clamp member 238, such that the fabric is retained between the clamps 238 and 240 at this time However, the forces applied to the clamp frame 254 by the cylinder 274 through the locking member 268 are less than the forces applied to the clamp member 240 by the air cylinder 296 through the piston 298 and ledge 252 Accordingly, the fabric clamp member 240, although engaged against the fabric, remains in its lower first position with the pin 248 located at the lower end of the slot 256, and with the fabric clamp member 240 spaced from the upper label clamp member 300.

Next, the operator may insert the label to be sewn into the cutout 244 of the clamp member 240, such that the label overlies the fabric The cutout 244 serves as a guide for placement of the label, since their sizes are approximately the same, as previously discussed After placement of the label, the operator fully depresses the first foot pedal to a second position while overcoming a slight force exerted by spring means in the pedal which serves as an indication to the operator of the pedal configuration between its first and second positions When the pedal is placed in its second position, the Pedal Clamp No 2 Switch is actuated, thus connecting the normally open contact of the switch to ground, and disconnecting its normally closed contact from ground.

In response to the signal from the switch, the control system generates a signal which causes full pressure to be developed in the cylinder 274 from the air source While in this condition, the forces applied by the cylinder plunger 286 through the locking member 268 to the clamp frame 254 are greater than those applied by the air cylinder 296 between the frame 254 and clamp member 240 Accordingly, the clamp frame 254 is driven toward the machine work surface 242 along with the upper clamp member 300, which is attached to the frame 254 by a pair of screws 302, while the ledge 252 of the fabric clamp member 240 bears against the piston 298 and drives the piston 298 back into the cylinder 296.

When the locking member 268 and clamp frame 254 are fully lowered, the label clamp member 300 engages against the fabric clamp member 240, and retains the label in place above the fabric As shown, the clamp member 300 has a peripheral portion 304 70 defining a window 306 which has been placed in alignment with the window 241 of the lower clamp member 238 and cutout 244 of the clamp member 240, in order that the fabric and label may be sewn 75 through the window 306 In this configuration, it will be apparent that the fabric clamp member 240 has been placed in its second upper position, with the pin 248 of the clamp tongue 246 located at the upper 80 end of the slot 256, and with the piston 298 being fully depressed into the cylinder 296 by the clamp ledge 252.

At this time the fabric and label are retained in a proper position for initation of 85 a sewing operation, and the operator may then depress a second pedal to initiate the run As will be seen in connection with the control system, the operator may or may not release the first pedal at this time, as she 90 prefers, but she must eventually release the first pedal before starting a subsequent sewing operation When the first pedal has been released, the normally closed contacts of the switches are again connected to ground, 95 while their normally open contacts are disconnected from ground.

The second foot pedal also has a singlepole, double-throw actuatable switch of a known type, which has been termed a Pedal 100 Go Switch As before, the normally closed contact of the switch is connected through a common terminal to ground When the pedal is depressed and the switch is actuated, the switch makes contact with the normally 105 open contact while breaking contact with the normally closed contact, thus connecting the normally open contact to ground and disconnecting the normally closed contact from ground 110 Assuming that the various clamps are in their proper configuration, as discussed further below, the control system generates a signal in response to the actuated Pedal Go Switch, and the system automatically 115 enters the homing mode followed by the sewing operation during which the fabric and label are sewn When the second pedal is released, the Pedal Go Switch assumes its normal condition with its normally 120 closed contact connected to ground, and with its normally open contact disconnected from ground.

As shown in Fig 1, a Clamp Sense Switch 308 is mounted between the tines 260 of the 125 retaining member 258, with a contact member 310 of the switch resting against a rear surface of the locking member 268 When the locking member 268 and associated clamps are raised by the cylinder 274, the 130 1,570,244 1,570,244 locking member 268 moves the contact member 310 towards the switch 308 In this configuration, the switch breaks contact from a normally open contact, and disconnects the contact from ground When the locking member 268 is lowered and the label clamp member 300 is driven against the fabric clamp member 240, the contact member 310 is permitted to move away from the switch 308 In this configuration, the switch makes contact with its normally open contact and connects it to ground.

Accordingly, it will be seen that the signal from the switch 308 provides an indication of whether or not the various clamps are in their proper configuration for performing a sewing operation Since it is undesirable to begin the operation while the machine is in a condition with the clamps not fully locked into place, the control system utilizes the signal from the switch 308 to prevent initiation of the sewing operation unless the clamps are in their proper configuration Due to a time delay associated with placement of the clamps after actuation of the Pedal Clamp Switches in the first foot pedal, it is possible that the operator may actuate the Pedal Go Switch in the second foot pedal before the clamps are locked into place Additionally, the control system prevents initiation of the sewing cycle in the event that the clamps are never properly locked, due to a possible malfunction in the machine.

Accordingly, necessary conditions for initiation of a sewing operation are that the Pedal Go Switch has been actuated through use of the second pedal, and that the clamps are fully locked in place as determined by the Clamp Sense Switch 308 Of course, the first condition will never be satisfied unless the Pedal Clamp Switches are actuated prior to actuation of the Pedal Go Switch, since the clamps will not be lowered into place and the resulting signal from the switch 308 will prevent a run In the event that the Pedal Go Switch has been actuated before the clamps are completely locked in place, the control system delays until the clamps are fully locked, as indicated by the switch 308, at which the time the homing mode will be entered and the sewing operation will be initiated without further actuation of the Pedal Go Switch.

As illustrated in Fig 1, a Thread Break Sensor 312 is mounted on the sewing machine above the needle 54 The sensor 312 measures the tension on the thread, and provides a signal to the control system which indicates whether or not the thread supplied to the needle has broken.

A thread cutting device generally designated 314 is shown in Figs 1 and 2 The device has a double acting air cylinder 316 which is actuated from a source of air by a four-way solenoid During cutting, air is supplied through a connector 318 to a first side of a piston in the cylinder, while air is exhausted through a second connector 320 resulting in movement of the piston in 70 the cylinder toward the left, as viewed in Fig 1, and movement of an actuating arm 322, which is connected to the piston, away from the cylinder 316 The device has a rocking member 324 pivotally mounted in 75 the device, with a first swinging blade 326 being secured to an upper end of the rocking member 324, and with a lever arm 328 extending from a lower end of the rocking member 324 The lever arm 328 has a ball 80 member 330 depending from the arm 328 adjacent its outer end, with the ball member 330 being pivotally received in the Ushaped portion 332 of the actuating arm 322.

Accordingly, during the cutting phase of 85 the device, the actuating arm 322 driven by the cylinder piston moves the lever arm 328 while the ball member 330 rotates in the U-shaped portion 332 of the actuating arm 322 In turn, the lever arm 328 causes rota 90 tion of the rocking member 324 which drives the first blade 326 and thread toward a second blade 334, and the thread is thus cut as the swinging blade passes below the second blade As seen in Fig 1, the dis 95 tance of travel for the piston during the cutting operation, as well as the swinging blade 326, is limited by nuts 336 on a rod 338 which is connected to the remote end of the piston, such that the nuts 336 abut 100 against the cylinder 316 when the blade 326 is located at the desired final position for cutting the thread.

After the thread has been cut, air is introduced through the connector 320 to the 105 second side of the piston, while air is exhausted from the first side of the piston through the connector 318 When the piston has been returned to its original position, the swinging blade 326 is placed at its 110 position for initiation of a subsequent cutting operation As shown in Fig 1, a continuous force is applied to the actuating arm 322 by a spring 340 which extends between a bracket 342 secured to the machine and 115 a connecting rod 344 extending from the arm 322 The spring 340 assures a smooth operation of the blade 326 and the resulting cutting operation, and facilitates return of the connecting arm 322 and blade 326 to 120 their initial position for performing another cut As will be described in connection with the control system the cutting device is automatically actuated to cut the thread at the end of a sewing operation, and in the 125 event that the work holder is moved from a first position to a spaced second position while the fabric is not being sewn.

For proper operation of the apparatus, the movement of the work holder must be 130 ID synchronized to the stitching cycle so that the work holder is moved only when the needle is not in the work piece Furthermore, the sewing machine must stop at the end of a sewing cycle with the needle in the up position so that the work holder may be moved to the home position and so that the sewn work piece may be removed from the work holder after the clamps are raised.

Thread cutting is also done as part of the "needle-up" sequence These functions are performed by a commercial apparatus 346, Quick, Model No 800-ST-362, as shown in Fig 15, in conjunction with the synchronization unit 62 and the control system.

As shown in Figs 1 and 16, the electromechanical synchronization unit 62 has an adapter 350 affixed to the sewing machine hand wheel 64, such that the adapter rotates with the hand wheel A bearing 352, a rotating slip ring assembly 348, and a photocell commutator ring 354 are received on a shaft 356 extending from the adapter 350, and are secured in place by a screw 358 extending into the outer end of the shaft, in order that they rotate with the hand wheel A stationary connector portion 360 of the assembly 348 includes four electrical brushes 362, 364, 366, and 368 Insulating portions 370, 372, and 374 provide electrical interruptions in three slip rings 376, 378, and 380 when these portions are contacted by the brushes 362, 364, and 368, respectively The brush 366 is used to supply electrical current to the slip rings from the Quick device 346 Current from the three active slip rings is supplied to the Quick device 346 to synchronize its operation, and separately provide a signal at the needle down position, the needle up position, and for cutting As will be further described below, the control system and the synchronization unit 62 in conjunction with the Quick device cause the sewing machine (a) to run at fast speed or slow speed; (b) to actuate the thread cutting device 314, as well as a thread tension release solenoid; and (c) to stop the machine with the needle in its up position As shown in Figs 1 and 15, the synchronization unit 62 and sewing machine is driven by the Quick device 346 through an endless belt 382 which passes around pulleys 384 and 386 connected to the unit 62 and device 346, respectively.

As best shown in Fig 16, a stationary support member 388 is received on the bearing 352 A first bracket 390 is mounted on the end of the support member 390 by suitable means, such as screws 392, and a plate 394 is secured to an upper flange 396 of the bracket 390 by a pair of screws 398.

A second bracket 400 is also mounted on the outer end of the support member 388 by a pair of screws (not shown), with the screws passing through an aperture 402 and a slot 404 in the bracket 400 It will be apparent that the bracket 400 may be adjusted to a desired position throughout the range of movement permitted by the slot 404 A second plate 406 is mounted on 70 a flange 408 of the bracket 400 by a pair of screws 410.

As shown, photo-reflective transducers 412 and 414 are mounted on the inner surfaces of the plates 394 and 406, respectively, 75 and in a position of alignment with a notch 416 in the ring 354 as it rotates, the notch 416 having a non-reflective surface coating within its confines In operation, light emitted by the transducers 412 and 414 strikes the 80 surface of ring 354 and is reflected to an optcial sensing portion of the transducers creating an output current The output currents of the transducers remain constant except during the time they are aligned with 85 the non-reflective notch 416 of the ring 354, at which time the amount of reflected light is greatly diminished Accordingly, the output signals change when the edges of the notch reach alignment with the respective 90 transducer, and as will be seen below, the signal change when the notch first reaches alignment with the transducers is utilized by the control system to provide an indication of the needle position 95 During normal operation of the machine, the signal from the primary transducer 414 is connected to the control system, and this signal, termed the Needle Disengage SensorP signal, indicates the time at which the 100 needle is about to leave the fabric and when the work holder may be moved without damage to the needle The position of the transducer 414 may be modified by suitable adjustment to the bracket 400, in order to 105 signal the precise time desired.

During normal operation, the auxiliary transducer 142 is disconnected from the control system as controlled by a Normal/ Service Select Switch However, when a 110 service mode for the machine is entered through use of the switch, during which time the function of the machine may be checkedby a serviceman, the signal from the primary transducer 414 is disconnected from the 115 control system, and the signal from the auxiliary transducer 412 is connected to the control system and used as the signal Needle Disengage Sensor-P Although under program control, during the service mode the 120 machine operates at a slow speed even if a fast speed command has been received.

Accordingly, the machine timing is determined by the transducer 414 during the service mode to assure that movement of 125 the work holder takes place while the needle is disengaged from the workpiece.

The Quick device 346, although commercially designed for actuation by a treadle, is made fully automatic herein, and will be 130 11 l 1,570,244 12 1,570,244 further described in connection with Figs.

and 17 to facilitate understanding of the system The device 346 has a motor 418 which drives a shaft 420, with a flywheel 422 being secured to one end of the shaft 420, and with a pulley 424 being secured adjacent the opposite end of the shaft The device 346 has another shaft 426 which is slidably and rotatably mounted in the housing 428 of the device The motor pulley 386 which drives the belt 382 is mounted on one end of the shaft 426, while a main clutch and brake disc 430 is secured to the other end of the shaft 426 A worm wheel 432 is rotatably mounted on the shaft 426 intermediate the disc 430 and a wall of the housing 428, and defines a main brake surface 434 facing the disc 430, while the flywheel 422 defines a main clutch surface 436 facing the disc 430.

The shaft 426 is movable between a first position with the disc 430 engaged against the clutch surface 426 of the flywheel 422, and a second position with the disc 430 engaged against the main brake surface 434 of the worm wheel 432 Accordingly, in the first position, the shaft 426 is directly coupled through the main clutch assembly to the motor shaft 420, and the shaft 426 and sewing machine are driven at a relatively fast speed As will be seen below the worm wheel 432 is either driven at a relatively slow speed or is stopped When the wheel 432 is rotating at its slow speed and the shaft 426 is at its second position, the shaft 426 and sewing machine will be driven at the slow speed This follows since the disc 430 has been disengaged from the main clutch surface 436 of the flywheel 422, and has been engaged against the main brake surface 434 of the worm wheel 432.

A main clutch/brake solenoid (not shown) is connected to an air cylinder 438, and actuates a lever (not shown) which is connected to the shaft 426 When the clutch/ brake solenoid is energized by the control system, the lever is actuated and moves the shaft 426 and disc 430 to its first clutching position for running the machine at fast speed When the clutch/brake solenoid is deenergized by the control system, the lever is actuated and moves the shaft 426 and disc 430 to its second braking position for slow speed operation and braking of the machine, as well as thread cutting.

A free turning pulley 440 is mounted on a worm shaft 442 which is coupled to the worm wheel 432 by a worm gear 444 An auxiliary clutch/brake disc 446 is splined on the worm shaft 442, and can be moved by a pair of solenoids (not shown) between a first position with the discs 446 engaged -against an auxiliary clutch surface 448 on the pulley 440, and a second position with lhe pulleys 424 and 440, thus driving the 65 surface 450 on the wall of the housing 428.

As shown, an endless belt 452 passes around the pulley 424 and 440, thus driving the free turning pulley 440.

When the disc 446 is moved to its first 70 clutching position, the pulley 440 drives the disc 446 through the clutch surface 448.

Since the disc 446 is splined on the shaft 442, the disc 446 and shaft 442 in turn drive the worm wheel 432 through the 75 worm gear 444, with the speed being suitably reduced relative to the motor shaft 420 by the pulleys 424 and 440 and the worm gear arrangement When the disc 446 is moved to its second braking position rota 80 tion of the worm wheel 432 is stopped, since the braking surface 450 stops rotation of the disc 446 which is splined to the worm shaft 442.

Under program control, the control system 85 normally starts the machine at its fast speed in response to a sequence of fast sew commands contained in the program memory In this configuration, the control system energizes the main clutch/brake 90 solenoid to engage the disc 430 against the clutch surface 436 of the flywheel 422 for operation of the machine at fast speed, as previously described At the same time, the disc 446 may be engaged against the auxi 95 liary clutch surface 448 of the pulley 440 resulting in rotation of the worm wheel 432, which does not affect operation of the machine since it freely rotates on the shaft 426.

Shortly prior to completion of the sewing 100 operation or prior to movement of the work holder without stitching, the control system operates the machine at the slow speed for a short period of time in response to a few consecutive slow sew commands in the 105 program memory At this time, the control system deenergizes the main brake/clutch solenoid, and the disc 430 engages the brake surface 434 of the worm wheel 432 Since the worm wheel 432 is being driven at slow 110 speed, the shaft 426 and sewing machine in turn is slowed to its slow speed The Quick device 346 utilizes the needle down position signal from the slip ring assembly 348 of the synchronization unit 62, as previously des 115 cribed, to determine when the machine has been de-accelerated to the desired slow speed When the machine is operating at its slow speed and when the last signal in response to a slow speed command has been 120 issued by the control system to the Quick device 346, the device 346 as modified performs the following operations.

The cut signal from the unit 62 changes state during the period of time between the 125 needle down and up position of the machine.

Immediately after both slow speed conditions are satisfied, as discussed above, the Quick device 346 awaits the first needle 1,570,244 1,570,244 down configuration of the sewing machine, as indicated by one of the signals from the slip ring assembly of the unit 62 When the needle down signal has been received, the Quick device seeks the change of state for the cut signal which occurs before the next needle up position of the machine.

When received the Quck device 346 initiates actuation of a tension release solenoid to release tension on the thread, and then actuation of the cutting device 314, described in connection with Figs 1 and 2, to cut the thread When the thread has been cut, an End of Cut signal is generated for the control system to indicate that the cutting operation has been completed Meanwhile, the Quick device 346 stops the sewing machine at its needle up position as follows.

Shortly after receipt of the cut signal from the unit 62, the Quick device 346 moves the disc 446, shown in Fig 17, to its second position in engagement against brake surface 450 at the time of the next needle up position of the machine, as determined by the needle up signal from the unit 62, such that reciprocation of the needle is stopped in its needle up position with the needle removed from the workpiece.

As noted above, the addressable storage element which is preferred in this embodiment is a programmable read only memory unit, hereinafter termed a PROM With the proper equipment, the operator of the automatic sewing machine according to this invention can change or add programs (i e, instructions or a sequence of instructions) to a PROM Depending on the information capacity of each storage location and the information content of each instruction, a single instruction may be stored in a single storage location On the other hand, in the preferred embodiment of the invention, each instruction utilizes more than one storage location The sequence of instructions stored describes a pattern which the automatic sewing machine work holder will follow In this particular embodiment the PROM has a randomly addressable eight binary digit (bit) word in each storage location and a total of 256 such locations.

Each instruction includes a command and work holder positioning data for the X and Y coordinate directions In the preferred embodiment there are four commands The first command directs movement of the work holder without stitching, the second directs movement of the work holder while stitching slowly; the third directs movemznt of the work holder while stitching at a fast rate; and the fourth indicates the end of the sequence of instructions and directs movement of the work holder to its home position Each of the first three commands recited above utilizes two groups of positioning data to form a complete instruction Each data group includes directional and stepping information necessary for a different one of the two coordinate directions to determine the next position of the work holder While there are many 70 possible ways of providing this information, it is preferred to construct each data group as a signed number which indicates the number of steps and the direction in which the work holder is to be moved Thus, this 75 particular embodiment of the invention utilizes an open loop system, that is, the work holder is moved from place to place during a sewing operation without the necessity of any feedback to indicate its present 80 position The maximum allowable number of steps in each coordinate direction during each sewing cycle is fifteen per instruction, although the number of steps permitted while operating the machine at its fast speed 85 may be reduced slightly, e g, twelve, due to possible timing restrictions, as will be seen below.

In this embodiment, each instruction, when written in binary utilizes twelve bits 90 The designation of the command portion of each instruction requires two bits and the work holder positioning data requires five bits for each coordinate direction, one for the direction (positive or negative) and four 95 bits to designate the number of steps As further described below, the control system reads three separate four bit words for use as a single twelve bit instruction Once the PROM has been programmed, that is, once 100 the PROM contains a sequence of instructions in a predetermined order to describe a desired sewing pattern, the sewing machine is ready for operation.

Referring now to Fig 18, there is shown 105 a cabinet 454 for housing the control system of the present embodiment As shown, the cabinet 454 may have a swinging door 456 which may be opened for connetcing a programmed PROM 458 to the control system 110 with electrical connectors 460 on the PROM being received in the sockets 462 A rotatable Program Select Switch 464 is provided to select the mode of operation for program control by setting the switch 464 at one of 115 a plurality of positions 466, as indicated by suitable indicia on the front panel of the cabinet.

As will be seen below, each PROM may have two banks, termed Banks A and B, 120 containing 256 four bit words The control system begins reading the four bit words at a low order address in one of the banks, and reads three four bit words from sequential storage locations in the given bank to 125 form the twelve bit instruction during each timing cycle of the sewing machine In this manner, the control system sequentially reads the data from the bank If two programs are sufficiently short to be programmed into 130 1,570,244 256 four bit words, one program may be placed entirely in Bank A, while the other program is located in Bank B Before starting a sewing operation, the operator may select the desired program by placing the setting for switch 464 at the appropriate position 466, one position being provided for Bank A, and another for Bank B In this configuration, when a sewing operation has been completed, the control system will remain selected at the chosen bank until the switch setting has been changed For example, if Bank B had been selected by the switch 464, each sewing operation will be performed as directed by the program contained in Bank B, so long as the switch remains at the Bank B setting As shown, lights 467 and 469 are provided to indicate the particular program bank being currently utilized by the control system, the light 467 representing Bank A, and the light 469 f' representing Bank B. Alternatively, the operator may place the switch 464 at a third position, termed the Remote setting or mode In this configuration, the operator may change program control between Banks A and B, as desired, by depressing a foot pedal Assuming that a given sewing operation has been performed as directed by the program contained in Bank A, each subsequent sewing operation will be controlled by the Bank A program until the foot pedal has been depressed, which actuates a Remote Program Select Switch Accordingly, the next sewing operation will be performed in accordance with the program contained in Bank B. The operator may again select Bank A by depressing the foot pedal, and the banks may be selected to perform sewing operations alternately from the two banks, if desired.

If the program is too long to be retained in a single bank, the first portion of the program is placed in Bank A, while the remainder of the program is located in Bank B In this case, the operator selects a fourth position 466 by the switch 464, placing the system into an Extended mode In this configuration, during each sewing operation the control system first reads the portion of the program contained in Bank A When this part of the program has been completed, the control system automatically begins reading the remainder of the program located in Bank B for completion of the sewing operation In this manner, a relatively long program may be utilized to perform a lengthy sewing operation without interruption of the sewing sequence The lights 467 and 469 also indicate which program bank is being used by the control system during the Remote and Extended modes.

Of course, PROMS may be changed between sewing operations to connect different programs to the control system As a precaution, power is removed from the control system while PROMS are being changed.

As shown, an Interlock Switch 468 is pro 70 vided which is actuated by the door 456.

When the door 456 is open while PROMS are being changed, the contacts of the Interlock Switch 468 are also open, and disconnect the power supply from the control 75 system When the door has been closed after the PROMS have been changed, the switch 468 and its contacts are also closed, thus connecting the power supply to the control system Accordingly, a necessary 80 condition for operation of the control system is that the door 456 has been closed.

A plurality of suitable switches 470 and lights 472 are also provided on a front panel 474 of the cabinet for controlling and moni 85 toring the operation of the control system and sewing machine As will be described in further detail below, one of the lights 472 may indicate when an overtemperature condition exists for the stepping motor drive 90 circuits, and the other light may indicate that power for the control system has been turned on.

As will be seen below, momentary actuation of a Reset Switch on the panel initializes 95 the control system for performing a sewing operation, and may be utilized in an emergency situation to terminate a sewing operation prior to its normal completion Another switch, termed the Clamp Switch, may be 100 utilized to cause lowering of the clamps, or place them under automatic control of the foot pedals and control system A third switch may be utilized to override operation of the thread break sensor, in case it is 105 desired to use the machine without thread, e.g, for check-out purposes A fourth switch, called a Pattern Drive Switch, may be utilized to inhibit operation of the X and Y stepping motors during check-out of the 110 machine Of course, one of the switches 470 may be utilized to control power turn on and turn off for selectively supplying power to the control system and machine.

A Normal/Service Select Switch has al 115 ready been described When this switch is placed in its Normal setting, the control system operates in its normal condition for performing sewing operations while utilizing the signal from the Primary Needle Dis 120 engage Sensor 414 of the unit 62 for synchronizing initiation of work holder movement The Service setting of the Normal/ Service Select Switch is utilized by a serviceman during check-out of the machine In 125 this configuration, the machine does not operate until a Jog Switch on the panel 474 is actuated, at which time the machine performs the sewing operation under program control at slow speed until the Jog 130 1,570,244 Switch has been reset As previously discussed, the control system utilizes the Auxiliary Needle Disengage Sensor 412 of the unit 62 to synchronize movement of the work holder during the Service mode.

Referring now to Figure 19, the operation of the sewing machine is controlled by a central control logic 676 First the operator places a workpiece in the proper position in the work holder 56.

Then, when the first foot pedal 678 of the sewing machine is fully depressed by the operator, actuating the Pedal Clamp No 1 and 2 Switches during placement of the fabric and label in the -work holder, as previously described, the central control logic 676 generates signals to lower the clamps and hold the fabric and label After the clamp has been lowered, the second foot pedal 679 is depressed by the operator to actuate the Pedal Go Switch, and, if the clamps have been fully closed, as indicated by the clamp Sense Switch 308, automatic operation of the machine begins.

In normal operation, a "homing" cycle is first initiated Thereafter, the first instruction is read by the logic 676 from the storage element 458, here shown as a PROM, according to the setting of the Program Select Switch 464 on the front panel 474 This logic responds by providing the correct number of pulses for moving the work holder, and, after a signal from the electromechanical synchronization unit 62, transmits these pulses to motor drive logics 684 and 686 The drive logics 684 and 686 drive respectively power drivers 688 and 690 which in turn drive stepping motors 58 and 60 in the desired direction and through the desired rotation.

The pulses to the drive logics 684 and 686 are arranged to be aperiodic to increase the machine cycle rate, and to prevent unwanted oscillations and therefore unwanted feeding of the workpiece against the needle.

The workpiece thus moves in a true intermittent motion, the workpiece being stationary when the needle is inserted into it.

More particularly, the central control logic 676 includes means for spacing the first three pulses of a series of pulses and the last two pulses of the series further apart than any remaining intermediate pulses.

Where the number of pulses to a stepping motor is less than three, the amount of current from the power drivers 688 and 690 may be reduced (by known means not shown) to further minimize oscillations in the stepping motors The next instruction is then read and carried out, followed by the one after that, etc, until the last instruction has been implemented In response to the last instruction which will be a stop command, the central control logic causes the Quick device to halt the sewing machine causes the thread to be cut, and then initiates a second homing cycle The homing cycle is controlled by the central control logic, which, in response to the signals from the homing optical sensors 164 and 694, cycles 70 the stepping motors to return the work holder to its radial and rotational home location.

Other inputs to the central logic are from circuitry 697 which generates the End of Cut Signal after the thread has been cut, 75 and the Thread Break Sensor 312 which signals the control logic 676 of a break in the needle thread Upon receipt of a break signal from the sensor 312, the control logic 676 causes the Quick device to halt the 80 sewing machine, and inhibits any further movement of the work holder by stopping the incrementation of an address counter 772 (Fig 20) which sequentially addresses the storage elements Thus, the address in 85 address counter 772 is preserved and the control logic 676 waits for a signal from the front panel before starting up again As will be explained hereafter, once the thread or needle has been repaired and replaced, 90 the operator may restart the machine at the beginning of the sewing pattern or restart it at the instruction following the instruction at which the break occurred.

Depending upon whether an instruction 95 requires slow or fast stitching, the control logic 676, in response to that instruction, will signal, through a driver 700, a control box 706 of the Quick device to cause the machine to stitch at the required speed If 100 a stop command is read, the control logic 676 deactivates the main brake/clutch valve solenoid 708, associated with the Quick device, through a driver 704 to initiate the stopping sequence of the sewing machine 105 The control logic 676 of Fig 19 is shown in greater detail in Fig 20 A sequencing circuitry 722 monitors over the cable labeled "CHECKS": (a) inputs from synchronization unit 62; (b) Clamp Sensor 308; (c) 110 Thrtad Break Sensor 312; (d) cutter circuitry 697; (e) front panel 474; and (f) optical sensors 164 and 694 for both coordinate directions Siganls from the switches in foot pedals 678 and 679 are read over the line 115 labeled "START" Gating logic circuits provided within the sequencing circuitry serve to halt machine and work holder operation if the proper operating conditions are not maintained When the operator depresses 120 the pedal 679 to actuate the Go Pedal Switch, this causes an enabling signal on line 724 to appear and initiate the first homing cycle when the Clamp Sensor indicates the work holder is closed This homing insures 125 that the work holder will be located at a predetermined initial position at the beginning of a sewing sequence.

Homing circuitry 726 operates together with the homing sensors and assemblies to 130 is 1,570,244 preset the work holder at the desired loca.

tions for sewing in each of the two coordinate directions As previously discussed, the coordinate directions are called X and Y, corresponding to a rectilinear coordinate system, although in the preferred embodiment the coordinate system is based on polar coordinates modified to approximate a rectilinear system The homing circuitry, in response to the enabling signal over line 724 from the sequencing circuitry 722, provides output signals over lines 732 and 734 to a direction steering circuitry 736, based upon the inputs from optical sensors 164 and 694 over lines 728 and 730 These output signals indicate the direction in which the stepping motors should be moved.

Direction steering circuitry 736 gates the signals on lines 732 and 734 to the motor drive logics 684 and 686 to control the direction of movement of the motors 58 and 60 The homing circuitry 726 also enables a pulse modifier circuitry 744 by a signal over line 745 so it is in condition to be enabled to provide output electrical pulses over lines 746 and 748 from the low speed oscillator 768 After the first homing approach, this output is preferably reduced in frequency by a rate modifier circuitry 749 to motor drive logics 684 and 686, as will be explained hereinafter, by the signals over a command line 751 from homing circuitry 726.

Pulse modifier circuitry 744 is enabled to gate these pulses to the motor drive logic by signals from a run/sew circuitry 750 over lines 752 and 754 Signals on one of these lines control the gating of pulses to one of the motors 58 or 60 while signals on the other control the gating of pulses to the other motor The signals on lines 752 and 754 are provided by the run/sew circuitry 750 in the homing mode by a set of input signals over lines 756 and 758 from homing circuitry 726 when there exists an enabling signal over line 724 from the sequencing circuitry 722 The absence of signals over one of lines 756 or 758 and thus one of lines 752 or 754 causes the pulse modifier circuitry to inhibit pulsing to the corresponding stepping motor This occurs whenever the home position for the corresponding coordinate direction has been achieved For proper operation of the pulse modifier circuitry during the homing cycle, there must be enabling signals over line 745 and one or both of lines 752 or 754.

In all cases, the stepning motors overshoot the home position When this occurs the optical sensors generate a signal which causes the motor involved to reverse and 'zero in on the correct home position.

This is done by changing the signals over lines 732 and/or 734 according to information from the optical sensors to reverse the direction of one or both stepping motors.

The homing circuitry also includes additional logic circuitry for ensuring that the final approach of each motor to its home position is always from the same direction 70 irrespective of the initial positon of the work holder prior to homing In addition, all homing motion after the first home approach in the basic home mode is accomplished at a reduced rate generated by rate 75 modifier circuitry 749 Means in the homing circuitry 726, responsive to the optical sensor outputs, provide the signal over command line 751 for causing the stepping rate to be reduced This mixture of stepping rates 80 creates an optimally fast and accurate homing cycle.

In this particular embodiment there is always at least one change of direction of approach to the home position for each 85 motor If, after reversing the motor, the second approach direction during the auxiliary home mode is not the same as an approach direction predetermined in advance, the direction of motor rotation is 90 automatically reversed again by logic in the homing circuitry which senses the direction of approach, and a third and final approach during a subauxiliary home mode is made from the predetermined approach direction 95 for the motor or motors involved In this way, greater accuracy in positioning the work holder is achieved As will be seen below, the work holder is moved slightly past the zero crossing position indicated by 100 the homing sensors in both the X and Y directions.

When the first homing cycle has been completed a signal is placed by the homing circuitry on line 760 from the homing 105 circuitry 726 to the sequencing circuitry 722.

In response to this signal, the enable level on line 724 is immediately removed by the sequencing circuitry thereby preventing further movement of the work holder at this 110 time The sequencing circuitry then initiates a memory cycle by generating an enable signal level over a line 762 This signal level allows words from storage element 458 to be addressed and read as follows The 115 output of a high speed oscillator 766 is reduced by a counter here labeled low speed oscillator 768 whose output is onetenth the frequency of the high speed oscillator The low speed oscillator 768 provides 120 periodic pulses which determine the rate at which the stepping motors will be driven.

The enable signal on line 762 enables the address counter 772 whose output on line 774 represents the address of the word 125 which will be read from the storage element.

The enable signal on line 762 also enables a count to three counter 776 whose outputs determine into which of three receiving units the four bit words are separately placed 130 1,570,244 The three units comprise a storage unit 778 which receives the command portion of the instruction and the signs of the coordinate directions, upcounter 780 and upcounter 782 The two upcounters and storage unit respectively receive the work holder positioning data for each coordinate direction and command information in one complement inverted form after it is inverted by an inverter 784 comprising several inverting gates.

In operation, the first clock pulse output of the high speed oscillator 766, after line 762 is enabled, increments address counter772 resulting in a new four bit word being available from the storage element over lines 790 The same clock pulse also increments the count to three counter which causes an enabling signal to appear on one of its output lines, namely line 792 corresponding to a count of one This in turn enables the upcounter 782 to store the four bit word containing Y position data in inverted form.

The inverted four bit word is entered into the upcounter 782 by the trailing edge of the same first clock pulse over line 793.

In the same fashion, the next clock pulse from the high speed oscillator increments counters 772 and 776, and causes the inverse of the next addressed four bit word to be read into upcounter 780 as determined by an enabling signal from count to three counter over line 794 This corresponds to a count of two.

The third clock pulse from the high speed oscillator again increments counters 772 and 776 and causes the next addressed four bit word to be read in inverted form into storage unit 778 as determined by an enabling signal from the count to three counter over line 796 This corresponds to a count of three The enabling signal on line 796 is also provided by a connection to the sequencing circuitry 722 in response to which the enabling signal on line 762 is removed As a result, the count to three counter 776 is reset to zero and address counter 772 is not incremented at this time.

Accordingly, one complete instruction of twelve bits has been read from the memory and is stored, parts in each of upcounters 780 and 782, and storage unit 778.

All that remains to utilize this instruction is to translate it into movement of the stepping motors 58 and 60 and into motion of the sewing machine, as required Where the read instructon required a sewing operation, this is accomplished by a signal from the synchronzing unit 62 which is connected to the sequencing circuitry over one of the lines entitled "CHECKS", and which causes the sequencing circuitry to provide an enabling signal over line 797 indicating that the needle is clear of the workpiece Where the read instruction did not require stitching, the equivalent of the Needle Disengage Signal from unit 62 is generated internally by logic means within the sequencing circuitry to produce an enabling signal over line 797 a short time after the new instruc 70 tion is read into storage In either instance, the enabling signal over line 797 is connected to the pulse modifier circuitry 744 which allows the stepping motors to be driven in accordance with the outputs of 75 upcounters 780 and 782 whenever appropriate signals are present on lines 752, 754, 842, and 844 The latter two lines are from the direction steering circuitry 736 After the enabling signal is provided on 80 line 797, clock signals from the low speed oscillator increment upcounters 780 and 782 through a count enable circuitry 800 over lines 802 and 804 At the same time, the same clock signals from the low speed 85 oscillator are connected to pulse modifier circuitry 744 Pulse trains from the pulse modifier circuitry to drive each stepping motor are derived from these low speed clock signals for each coordinate direction 90 The outputs of upcounters 780 and 782 determine the number of output pulses there will be to step each motor in a given coordinate direction The directions are determined by the direction indicating portions of 95 the word stored in storage unit 778 The direction indicating portions are gated to the stepping motor drive logic by the direction steering logic 736 The number of output pulses to each motor corresponds to 100 the data, the inverse of which was initially stored in the upcounters The upcounters are constructed so that, when they have been incremented a number of times equal to the number of steps specified in the in 105 struction, a separate carry output appears on lines 806 and 808 The carry outputs are sent to the run/sew circuitry and affect the pulse modifier circuitry 744 by run/sew circuitry 750 response over lines 752 and 110 754 As noted above, signals over one or the other of lines 752 or 754 indicate that a proper number of input pulses from the low speed oscillator have been received for a particular coordinate direction When both 115 carry outputs appear (and, of course, they need not appear in the same clock cycle) the sequencing circuitry 722 causes the enable signal on line 797 to be removed thereby indicating that the information con 120 tained in the instruction last read from the memory has been utilized.

The pulse modifier circuitry operates as follows During the homing cycle when there is the enabling signal on line 745, pulses 125 from the low speed oscillator are applied to the stepping motors in the coordinate direction or directions indicated by the signals on lines 732 and 734 During that portion of the logic operation when there is an en 130 1,570,244 abling signal on line 797 due to a single instruction being utlized, the periodic pulses from the low speed oscillator 768 are gated according to the data stored in the upcounters 780 and 782 to provide pulse trains to the stepping motor drive logics over lines 746 and 748 If the number of steps in a coordinate direction is at least four, the pulse train for that direction is derived as follows.

After the enable signal on line 797 appears, the first clock signal from the low speed oscillator is passed through the pulse modifier circuitry to the drive logic The second and third clock signals from the low speed oscillator are blocked and an initial delayed pulse is added by the pulse modifier circuitry approximately equidistant between what would originally have been the second and third clock signals The clock signals from the low speed oscillator after the third clock signal pass through circuitry 744 essentially unchanged as long as there is no change in signal level over whichever one of lines 752 or 754 corresponds to the co, ordinate direction concerned After a change in signal level on one of lines 752 or 754 further clock signals from the low speed oscillator are blocked from forming part of the output pulse train for that coordinate direction Thereafter two additional terminal delayed and spaced pulses are automatically added by the pulse modifier to the otherwise terminated output pulse train These pulses are added at predetermined intervals of time following the last pulse in the train, the time intervals being greater than the time between pulses from the low speed oscillator As a result, the drive pulses to the stepping motors are aperiodic, having a somewhat lower frequency at both the beginning and end of the pulse train and a higher frequency in the middle of the pulse train This allows an increased machine cycle rate with smaller oscillations and therefore more accurate positioning If the number of steps in a coordinate direction is equal to three, only one pulse is added to the pulse train, as will be described in detail below.

When the information from storage element 458 was entered into uncounters 780 and 782, if the number of steps specified for either coordinate direction was one or two, this information was stored in decode circuitry 798 and is made available to the pulse modifier circuitry over line 809 The pulse modifier circuitry in response to this information from decode circuitry 798 alters its normal operation, described above, so that, if only two stepping pulses are required, only the initial delayed pulse is added and if only one pulse is required neither the initial nor the terminal delayed pulses are added.

When the called for number of X and Y steps has been obtained, as indicated by a change in the carry out signals from the upcounters, the enable signal 797 is removed and the sequencing circuitry, after a short 70 delay, starts a new memory cycle, and provides an enable signal over line 762 to read the next instruction from memory The operation of control circuitry 676 then repeats until an end of program signal is 75 encountered.

Storage element 778 stores the command and direction information as described above Each bit of the command is connected to decode circuitry 830 Each out 80 put line of decode circuitry 830 collectively labeled 832 is associated with a particular command The code circuitry decodes the command stored in unit 778 and provides an enabling signal level on the one of its 85 output lines 832 associated with that command Output lines 832 are connected to the sequencing circuitry 722 where they are amplified before boinb sent on to the Quick device over line 867 to control the opera 90 tion of the sewing machine.

The sequencing circuitry utilizes the signals over lines 832 for two purposes First to differentiate between stitch and no stitch commands to effect proper operation of the 95 Quick device, and, second, in response to a stop command, to provide end of program sequencing which includes signalling cutter circuitry 697 to cut the thread and return the work holder to its home position To 100 accomplish the latter operation, an enabling signal on a line 724 is generated in response to the End of Cut Signal from the cutter circuitry 697 in the presence of an "end of program" signal or command over one of 105 the lines 832 After this second homing cycle is completed, the clamps are raised in response to a signal from central control logic 674 to a solenoid actuated air valve 814 through driver 812 so that the work 110 piece can be removed.

The Quick device utilizes the signals over lines 867 from the sequencing circuitry 722 to stitch fast or slow, and to initiate a needle up and trim in response to the stop or move 115 without stitching commands.

As shown in Fig 20, program select circuitry 860 in response to the Program Select Switch has an output over line 862 which indicates to the PROM whether to choose 120 the program from Bank A or B The program select circuitry 860 and address counter 772 are interconnected by lines 864 and 866 to control switching between memory banks, as will be further described below 125 The detailed electrical circuitry of the control system will be described in connection with Fig 21 As shown in Fig 21 m, the power supply for the sewing machine includes a + 5 volts power source and a -12 130 1,570,244 volts power source When the Power Switch in the front panel 474 of the cabinet 454 (shown in Fig 18) is closed, the power sources are connected to the control system as + 5 Volts and and -12 Volts Switched.

When the desired PROM has been placed in the cabinet and the cabinet door has been closed, the Interlock Switch is also closed which connects the power source + 5 Volts and -12 Volts Switched to the system as + 5 Volts and -12 Volts Switched and Interlocked, as shown in Fig 21 a.

Accordingly, the power sources do not energize the control system until the cabinet door and Interlock Switch are closed The + 5 Volts Switched and Interlocked power source, which will be referred to hereinafter as Vcc, is primarily utilized to energize the electrical circuitry of the control system described as follows, while the -12 Volts Switched and Interlocked power source is used elsewhere in the system and machine.

As shown in the drawing, both the + 5 volt and -12 volt power sources are returned to ground.

As shown in Fig 21 b, the + 5 volt Vcc power source is supplied to a Reed Relay upon power turn-on if the Interlock Switch has previously been closed, or when the Interlock Switch is closed if power has previously been turned on The Reed Relay may be of the type sold by Sigma Instruments, Inc of Braintree Massachusettes, United States of America, and identified as Part No 191 T El C 6-55 When the source Vcc is initially supplied to the circuit shown in Fig 21 b, the line Reset-N is clamped to ground by the Reed Relay, and energization of the Reed Relay by Vcc is delayed approximately 10 milliseconds by the resistor R 74 and the capacitor C 109 During this delay, the line or signal Reset-N remains at a grounded or lo state Once the Reed Relay is energized, after the 10 millisecond delay, Reset-N is disconnected from ground, and is set at approximately 31 to 4 volts by the supply Vcc, the resistor R 75 and R 76, and the capacitor C 108 Thereafter, the signal Reset-N remains at its hi state throughout operation of the system unless the power supply is reapplied to the Reed Relay, through use of the Power or Interlock Switches, or unless the Reset Switch on the front cabinet panel is closed.

As shown in Figs 21 a and 21 m, the Reset Switch is normally open, and may be closed by the operator in the event of an emergency situation, or if it is desired to restart the entire sequence of the control system without turning the power supply off As shown, the signal Reset-N is grounded during the period of time that the momentary Reset Switch is closed by the operator.

During the period of time that the signal Reset-N is grounded or lo, Reset-N is utilized to initialize various flip flops and other components of the control system As will be seen in the various circuits described below, Reset-N is isolated from many of the components, particularly the flip flops, 70 by various diodes when the signal Reset-N returns to its hi condition Reference is made to Fig 21 g for an example of the manner in which the signal Reset-N initializes the control system As shown, the 75 signal End of Program-P, which is lo at this time, and Reset-N are connected as inputs to a NOR gate in the flip flop 239 A.

Accordingly, when the signal Reset-N goes lo, the flip flop is reset, such that the output 80 of the flip flop is reset hi, while the signal End of Program Model IP is reset lo.

As shown in Fig 21 c, a High Speed Oscillator H S O is energized by Vcc through a circuit 500 of various resistors 85 and capacitors The High Speed Oscillator H.S O generates a square wave signal at a rate of 8500 cycles per second as the signal H.S Clock The H S Clock signal from the oscillator is connected to the inverter 124 A 90 which inverts the clock signal at its output 124 A( 10), as illustrated in Figs 21 c and 22 The inverted H S Clock signal is differentiated by a differentiator circuit 501, comprising a capacitor C 86 and resistor 95 R 22, the latter of which is connected to ground, such that a train of positive pulses is generated by the differentiator circuit 501 on the leading edge of the signal I 24 A( 10) and passed to the inverter I 24 B at its input 100 13 The positive pulses generated by the differentiator circuit 501 are inverted by the inverter I 24 B and passed to the NOR gate N 038 A at its input 12 When the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N later goes lo, the lo 105 pulse train at N 038 A( 12) is inverted by the gate N 038 A, such that the signal Clock Pulse is formed, as shown in Fig 22 The signal Clock Pulse comprises a train of narrow positive pulses which are generated 110 at the trailing edge of the H S Clock signal from the high speed oscillator However, as shown in Fig 21 d, the signal Reset-N resets the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N at its hi state during initializaton of the control 115 system This follows since during the period of time that Reset-N is temporarily in its lo condition, both inputs 5 and 6 of the flip flop f#34 A are lo, and Memory Cycle Enable-N is accordingly reset hi Thus, as 120 shown in Fig 21 c, after initialization the signal Clock Pulse is inhibited and maintained lo by Mem Cycle Enable-N until Mem Cycle Enable-N is later set lo, as will be discussed below 125 As further shown in Fig 21 c, the H S.

Clock signal is connected to input 1 of a count-to-ten counter CT 2 of known type.

The counter has an internal divide by five circuit and an internal divide by two cir 130 i.9 1,570,244 cuit, which may be connected for use in the following manner As shown in Fig 21 c and 23, the counter output 12, designated CT 2 ( 12), changes state corresponding to the trailing edge of every fifth pulse in the signal H S Clock Thus, the counter CT 2 acts as a frequency divider at the rate of ten, such that a pulse train of 850 cycles/ second is formed at the output of the counter CT 2 As shown, the divided pulse train is connected to a count-to-two counter CT 13 at its input 14 and to a NOR gate NO 23 A The output of counter CT 13 changes state corresponding to the trailing edge of every pulse from the counter CT 2 and every tenth pulse from the signal H S.

Clock Accordingly, the counters CT 2 and CT 13 act as a frequency divider at the rate of twenty, to form the pulse train of 425 cycles/second at the output CT 13 ( 12) of the counter CT 13 which is connected to the inverter I 24 C.

The low speed pulse train from the counter CT 13 is inverted by the inverter I 24 C, and the inverted pulse train is connected to the NOR gate NO 23 B at its input 11 As shown in Fig 21 e, the flip flop ff 45 A of NAND gates is reset at its input 2 by Reset-N during initialization, such that LS Shift-N is reset hi at this time Accordingly, as shown in Fig 21 c, when the signal LS Shift-N is hi, it inhibits the output of NOR gate NO 23 B, such that the signal Homing LS Osc-P remains lo until LS Shift-N is later set lo The signal LS Shift-N is also connected to the inverter I 24 D, and the input 3 of NOR gate NO 23 A is thus lo when the signal LS Shift-N is hi Accordingly, since LS Shift-N is now hi, the modifled pulse train of 850 cycles/second is inverted by the NOR gate NO 23 A and passed to input 5 of the NOR gate NO 23 C Since the output of gate NO 23 B, Homing LS Osc-P, is now lo, the inverted pulse train from gate NO 23 A is again inverted by the gate NO 23 C, such that a modified pulse train of 850 cycles/second, corresponding to the output of the counter CT 2, is formed at its output as the signal LS Osc-N.

At a later time, when the signal LS ShiftN is set lo, the NOR gate NO 23 B again inverts the pulse train from the inverter I 24 C, and forms a low speed pulse train of 425 cycles/second, corresponding to the output of counter CT 13, as the signal Homing LS Osc-P at its output The signal LS Shift-N is inverted by the inverter I 24 D, and the output of NOR gate NO 23 A is accordingly set lo when LS Shift-N is lo.

Since the signal Homing LS Osc-P is connected to the NOR gate NO 23 C at its input 6, and since input 5 of gate NO 23 C is lo, the low speed pulse train Homing LS Osc-P is inverted by NOR gate NO 23 C and the inverted train is formed by the gate as the signal LS Osc-N, which corresponds to the inverted low speed pulse train of Homing LS Osc-P when LS Shift-N is lo Accordingly, the signal Homing LS Osc-P is lo and the signal LS Osc-N is the modified pulse 70 train of 850 cycles/second when LS Shift-N is hi, and the signal Homing LS Osc-P is the low speed pulse train of 425 cycles/ second and the signal LS Osc-N is an inverted low speed pulse train of 425 75 cycles/second when LS Shift-N is lo As previously indicated, the signal LS Shift-N is set hi during initialization, and, accordingly, Homing LS Osc-P is set lo and the signal LS Osc-N corresponds to the modi 80 fled pulse train from the counter CT 2 at this time.

For convenience, the remainder of the circuit in Fig 21 c, concerned with generation of the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P, will 85 now be described as follows As shown in Fig 21 m, when the Normal Service Select Switch on the front panel is selected at its Normal setting, the signal from the Primary Needle Disengage Sensor 414 of unit 62 is 90 connected by a contact in the switch as the signal Needle Disengage Sensor-P, while the signal from the Auxiliary Needle Disengage Sensor 412 is connected by the switch contact as the Needle Disengage 95 Senor-P signal at the Service setting of the switch As shown in Fig 21 c, the signal Needle Disengage Sensor-P from the selected photosensor is connected to the base of a transistor T 1 When the photosensor or 100 transducer is aligned with the notch 416 of the commutator ring 354, the signal Needle Disengage Sensor-P is set hi, and the output of the transistor T 1 at pin 1 of the Schmitt trigger ST 37 is set lo Conversely, 105 when the photosensor is not aligned with the notch 416, the signal Needle Disengage Sensor-P is lo, and the output of the transistor T 1 to the Schmitt trigger is hi Accordingly, when the notch first comes into 110 alignment with the photosensor, the input to the Schmitt trigger changes from a hi to lo condition The Schmitt trigger ST 37 sharpens up and inverts the signal from the transistor at input ST 37 ( 1), and the modi 115 fled output ST 37 ( 6) from the Schmitt trigger is connected to the input or pin 2 of a monostable multivibrator or single-shot S 548 A of known type.

The operation of the single-shot S 548 A, 120 as well as the other single-shots utilized in the control system is described as follows in conjunction with Fig 24 Each of the singleshots SS have 2 inputs, input a and input b, which may be utilized to trigger the single 125 shot Input a corresponds to pins 9 or 1 of the single-shot SS, while input b corresponds to pins 10 or 2 of the single-shot The single-shots SS have an internal inverter I and an AND gate A, with the output of the 130 1,570,244 The three units comprise a storage unit 778 which receives the command portion of the instruction and the signs of the coordinate directions, upcounter 780 and upcounter 782 The two upcounters and storage unit respectively receive the work holder positioning data for each coordinate direction and command information in one complement inverted form after it is inverted by an inverter 784 comprising several inverting gates.

In operation, the first clock pulse output of the high speed oscillator 766, after line 762 is enabled, increments address counter 772 resulting in a new four bit word being available from the storage element over lines 790 The same clock pulse also increments the count to three counter which causes an enabling signal to appear on one of its output lines, namely line 792 corresponding to a count of one This in turn enables the upcounter 782 to store the four bit word containing Y position data in inverted form.

The third clock pulse from the high speed oscillator again increments counters 772 and 776 and causes the next addressed four bit word to be read in inverted form into storage unit 778 as determined by an enabling signal from the count to three counter over line 796 This corresponds to a count of three The enabling signal on line 796 is also provided by a connection to the sequencing circuitry 722 in response to which the enabling signal on line 762 is removed As a result, the count to three counter 776 is reset to zero, and address counter 772 is not incremented at this time.

All that remains to utilize this instruction is to translate it into movement of the stepping motors 58 and 60 and into motion of the sewing machine, as required Where the read instructon required a sewing operation, this is accomplished by a signal from the synchronzing unit 62 which is connected to the sequencina circuitry over one of the lines entitled "CHECKS", and which causes the sequencing circuitry to provide an enabling signal over line 797 indicating that the needle is clear of the workpiece Where the read instruction did not require stitching, the equivalent of the Needle Disengage Signal from unit 62 is generated internally by logic means within the sequencing circuitry to produce an enabling signal over line 797 a short time after the new instruc 70 tion is read into storage In either instance, the enabling signal over line 797 is connected to the pulse modifier circuitry 744 which allows the stepping motors to be driven in accordance with the outputs of 75 upcounters 780 and 782 whenever appropriate signals are present on lines 752, 754, 842, and 844 The latter two lines are from the direction steering circuitry 736.

After the enabling signal is provided on 80 line 797, clock signals from the low speed oscillator increment upcounters 780 and 782 through a count enable circuitry 800 over lines 802 and 804 At the same: time, the same clock signals from the low speed 85 oscillator are connected to pulse modifier circuitry 744 Pulse trains from the pulse modifier circuitry to drive each stepping motor are derived from these low speed clock signals for each coordinate direction 90 The outputs of upcounters 780 and 782 determine the number of output pulses there will be to step each motor in a given coordinate direction The directions are determined by the direction indicating portions of 95 the word stored in storage unit 778 The direction indicating portions are gated to the stepping motor drive logic by the direction steering logic 736 The number of output pulses to each motor corresponds to 100 the data, the inverse of which was initially stored in the upcounters The upcounters are constructed so that, when they have been incremented a number of times equal to the number of steps specified in the in 105 struction, a separate carry output appears on lines 806 and 808 The carry outputs are sent to the run/sew circuitry and affect the pulse modifier circuitry 744 by run/sew circuitry 750 response over lines 752 and 110 754 As noted above, signals over one or the other of lines 752 or 754 indicate that a proper number of input pulses from the low speed oscillator have been received for a particular coordinate direction When both 115 carry outputs appear (and, of course, they need not appear in the same clock cycle) the sequencing circuitry 722 causes the enable signal on line 797 to be removed thereby indicating that the information con 120 tained in the instruction last read from the memory has been utilized.

After the enable signal on line 797 appears, the first clock signal from the low speed oscillator is passed through the pulse modifier circuitry to the drive logic The second and third clock signals from the low speed oscillator are blocked and an initial delayed pulse is added by the pulse modifier circuitry approximately equidistant between what would originally have been the second and third clock signals The clock signals from the low speed oscillator after the third clock signal pass through circuitry 744 essentially unchanged as long as there is no change in signal level over whichever one of lines 752 or 754 corresponds to the coordinate direction concerned After a change in signal level on one of lines 752 or 754 further clock signals from the low speed oscillator are blocked from forming part of the output pulse train for that coordinate direction Thereafter twoadditional terminal delayed and spaced pulses are automatically added by the pulse modifier to the otherwise terminated output pulse train These pulses are added at predetermined intervals of time following the last pulse in the train, the time intervals being greater than the time between pulses from the low speed oscillator As a result, the drive pulses to the stepping motors are aperiodic, having a somewhat lower frequency at both the be-ginning and end of the pulse train and a higher frequency in the middle of the pulse train This allows an increased machine cycle rate with smaller oscillations and therefore more accurate positioning If the number of steps in a coordinate direction is equal to three, only one pulse is added to the pulse train, as will be described in detail below.

When the information from storage element 458 was entered into uncounters 780 and 782, if the number of steps specified for either coordinate direction was one or two this information was stored in decode circuitry 798 and is made available to the pulse modifier circuitry over line 809 The pulse modifier circuitry in response to this information from decode circuitry 798 alters its normal operation, described above, so that, if only two stepping pulses are required, only the initial delayed pulse is added and if only one pulse is required neither the initial nor the terminal delayed pulses are added.

As shown in Pigs 21 a and 21 m, the Reset Switch is normally open, and may be closed by the operator in the event of an emergency situation, or if it is desired to restart the entire sequence of the control system without turning the power supply off As shown, the signal Reset-N is grounded during the period of time that the momentary Reset Switch is closed by the operator.

During the period of time that the signal Reset-N is grounded or lo, Reset-N is utilized to initialize various flip flops and other components of the control system As will be seen in the various circuits described below, Reset-N is isolated from many of the components, particularly the flip flops, 70 by various diodes when the signal Reset-N returns to its hi condition Reference is made to Fig 21 g for an example of the manner in which the signal Reset-N initializes the control system As shown, the 75 signal End of Program-P, which is lo at this time, and Reset-N are connected as inputs to a NOR gate in the flip flop f#39 A.

Accordingly, when the signal Reset-N goes lo, the flip flop is reset, such that the output 80 of the flip flop is reset hi, while the signal End of Program Model 1 P is reset lo.

As shown in Fig 21 c, a High Speed Oscillator H S O is energized by Vcc through a circuit 500 of various resistors 85 and capacitors The High Speed Oscillator H.S O generates a square wave signal at a rate of 8500 cycles per second as the signal H.S Clock The H S Clock signal from the oscillator is connected to the inverter 124 A 90 which inverts the clock signal at its output 124 A( 10), as illustrated in Figs 21 c and 22 The inverted H S Clock signal is differentiated by a differentiator circuit 501, comprising a capacitor C 86 and resistor 95 R 22, the latter of which is connected to ground, such that a train of positive pulses is generated by the differentiator circuit 501 on the leading edge of the signal I 24 A( 10) and passed to the inverter I 24 B at its input 100 13 The positive pulses generated by the differentiator circuit 501 are inverted by the inverter 124 B and passed to the NOR gate N 038 A at its input 12 When the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N later goes lo, the lo 105 pulse train at NO 38 A( 12) is inverted by the gate N 038 A, such that the signal Clock Pulse is formed, as shown in Fig 22 The signal Clock Pulse comprises a train of narrow positive pulses which are generated 110 at the trailing edge of the H S Clock signal from the high speed oscillator However, as shown in Fig 21 d, the signal Reset-N resets the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N at its hi state during initializaton of the control 115 system This follows since during the period of time that Reset-N is temporarily in its lo condition, both inputs 5 and 6 of the flip flop f 34 A are lo, and Memory Cycle Enable-N is accordingly reset hi Thus, as 120 shown in Fig 21 c, after initialization the signal Clock Pulse is inhibited and maintained lo by Mem Cycle Enable-N until Mem Cycle Enable-N is later set lo, as will be discussed below 125 As further shown in Fig 21 c, the H S.

The counter has an internal divide by five circuit and an internal divide by two cir 130 1,570,244 cuit, which may be connected for use in the following manner As shown in Fig 21 c and 23, the counter output 12, designated CT 2 ( 12), changes state corresponding to the trailing edge of every fifth pulse in the signal H S Clock Thus, the counter CT 2 acts as a frequency divider at the rate of ten, such that a pulse train of 850 cycles/ second is formed at the output of the counter CT 2 As shown, the divided pulse train is connected to a count-to-two counter CT 13 at its input 14 and to a NOR gate NO 23 A The output of counter CT 13 changes state corresponding to the trailing edge of every pulse from the counter CT 2 and every tenth pulse from the signal H S.

The low speed pulse train from the counter CT 13 is inverted by the inverter I 24 C, and the inverted pulse train is connected to the NOR gate NO 23 B at its input 11 As shown in Fig 21 e, the flip flop f 145 A of NAND gates is reset at its input 2 by Reset-N during initialization, such that LS Shift-N is reset hi at this time Accordingly, as shown in Fig 21 c, when the signal LS Shift-N is hi, it inhibits the output of NOR gate NO 23 B, such that the signal Homing LS Osc-P remains lo until LS Shift-N is later set lo The signal LS Shift-N is also connected to the inverter I 24 D, and the input 3 of NOR gate NO 23 A is thus lo when the signal LS Shift-N is hi Accordingly, since LS Shift-N is now hi, the modifled pulse train of 850 cycles/second is inverted by the NOR gate NO 23 A and passed to input 5 of the NOR gate NO 23 C Since the output of gate NO 23 B, Homing LS Osc-P, is now lo, the inverted pulse train from gate NO 23 A is again inverted by the gate NO 23 C, such that a modified pulse train of 850 cycles/second, corresponding to the output of the counter CT 2, is formed at its output as the signal LS Osc-N.

* At a later time, when the signal LS ShiftN is set lo, the NOR gate NO 23 B again inverts the pulse train from the inverter I 24 C, and forms a low speed pulse train of 425 cycles/second, corresponding to the output of counter CT 13, as the signal Homing LS Osc-P at its output The signal LS Shift-N is inverted by the inverter I 24 D), and the output of NOR gate NO 23 A is accordingly set lo when LS Shift-N is lo.

The operation of the single-shot S 548 A, 120 as well as the other single-shots utilized in the control system is described as follows in conjunction with Fig 24 Each of the singleshots SS have 2 inputs, input a and input b, which may be utilized to trigger the single 125 shot Input a corresponds to pins 9 or 1 of the single-shot SS, while input b corresponds to pins 10 or 2 of the single-shot The single-shots SS have an internal inverter I and an AND gate A, with the output of the 130 1,570,244 AND gate A triggering the single-shot SS.

The input a is connected to the inverter I, and the output of the inverter I is connected as one of the inputs of the AND gate A, while the input b is connected as the other input of the AND gate A Since a hi output of the AND gate A triggers the single-shot SS, the single-shot may be triggered by suitable conditions of the inputs as follows It will be seen that both a hi state on input b and a lo on input a of the gate will trigger the single-shot If desired, both inputs, input a and input b, may be utilized by connecting time to various parts of the circuitry to trigger the singleshot Alternatively, the input a may be held lo by connecting input a to ground, such that the input to the AND gate A from inverter I will remain hi In this configuration, the single-shot will be triggered when input b goes from a lo state to a hi state, in order that the single-shot may be triggered on a hi signal Alternatively, the single-shot SS may be triggered by a lo signal at input a by connecting input b to the power source Vcc, such that the input to the AND gate A from input b will always be hi Accordingly, in this configuration, when input a changes from a hi to lo state, the input from inverter I to AND gate A goes from lo to hi, and the single-shot is triggered.

The output Q of the single-shot SS is normally lo, and the output Q hereinafter referred to as Q bar, is normally hi When the single-shot SS is triggered by the inputs, the output Q of the single-shot immediately goes hi, while the output Q bar immediately goes lo The triggered outputs of the single-shot remain in the modified state during a period of time which is controlled by the RC circuit connected to the singleshot, and by suitable adjustment of the potentiometer in the circuit When the singleshot times out, the Q and Q bar outputs return to their normal lo and hi state, respectively.

Returning now to Fig 21 c, the output from the Schmitt trigger ST 37 connected to pin 2 of the single-shot S 548 A triggers the single-shot when the signal goes hi, since the other input at pin 1 of the single-shot is connected to ground, in accordance with the discussion above The Q output of the triggered single-shot S 548 A is thus set hi for a period of time and overrides possible fluctuations in the signals from the photosensor and Schmitt trigger As shown, the Q output of single-shot S 548 A is connected to input 4 of a flip flop #f 12 A and input 12 of NAND gate NA 12 B which are hi at this time, but return to a lo condition when the single-shot times out The pulse train signal LS Osc-N is inverted by inverter IIA, and the inverted pulse train from inverter IIA is differentiated by a differentiator circuit 502, comprising capacitor C 7 and resistor R 25 which generates a series of relatively sharp pulses at the leading edges of the pulses in the inverted pulse train from in 70 verter IIA Accordingly, when input 12 of NAND gate NA 12 B is set hi by the singleshot S 548 A, at least one pulse is inverted by the gate NA 12 B, and the lo pulse sets the flip flop 12 A, such that its output 3 75 goes hi As the output if 12 A( 3) of the flip flop is set hi, the differentiator circuit 504, comprising capacitor C 114 and resistor R 3, generates a positive pulse which is amplified and inverted twice by the inverters 11 B and 80 I 1 C, resulting in a positive pulse for the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P Accordingly, it will be seen that after the photosensor senses the commutator notch, resulting in a hi state for the Needle Disengage 85 Sensor-P signal, and immediately after receipt of the first pulse at NAND gate NA 12 B, thep ositive pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P is formed This signal is utilized to start movement of the clamps, as will be 90 discussed below When the single-shot S 548 A times out, and its Q output returns lo, the flip flop if 12 A is reset by the lo state at input i 12 A( 4) and the hi condition at the output of NAND gate NA 12 B 95 connected to flip flop ffl 2 A, such that the output 3 of flip flop if 12 A is reset lo.

The circuitry primarily concerned with the pedals and clamps is illustrated in Fig.

21 f During initialization of the system, the 100 signal Reset-N is utilized to reset a number of flip flops in the circuit as follows: flip flop fi 92 A at input 4; flip flop f 192 B at input 12; flip flop fif 90 A at input 5; and flip flop If 78 A at input 12 The 105 circuit of Fig 21 f remains in the initialized state until actuation of the first foot pedal on the sewing machine.

As previously discussed, before the operator depresses the first pedal, the Pedal 110 Clamp No 1 Switch has its normally closed crntact connected to ground, as shown, such that input 2 of an optoisolator or optocoupler OP 94 is connected through the switch to ground The optoisolator serves as 115 a noise filter, and has a photo-sensitive transistor with a light sensitive base When radiation falls on the base junction, current is permitted to flow through the collector of the transistor Accordingly, when the 120 Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch is in its normally closed position, before the first pedal on the machine is depressed, the output 5 of optoisolator OP 94 is in a lo condition, as well as the signal Clamp Switch Off-N which is 125 lo at this time.

As the pedal is depressed by the operator and the switch is actuated, the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch breaks contact with the normally closed terminal, and makes 130 211,570,244 contact with its normally open terminal and input 2 of optoisolator OP 93 Accordingly, input 2 of optoisolator OP 94 is disconnected from ground, and output 5 of optoisolator OP 94 and the signal Clamp Switch Off-N is set hi Conversely, when the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch is actuated by the operator, input 2 of optoisolator OP 93 is connected to ground, and output 5 of optoisolator OP 93 and input 9 of flip flop fi 92 B is set lo which set the flip flop Thus, output 8 of flip flop 092 B and input 9 of NOR gate N 09 OB are both set hi, such that the output of gate NO 9 OB and the inputs of the open collector driver circuit DC 98 A are set lo.

Under this condition, the output signal Clamp No 1 Cmd from driver circuit DC 89 A causes application of a moderate amount of pressure to the air cylinder 274 and closure of the fabric clamp 240, as previously described Contrawise, a hi state at the output of gate N 09 OB and the input of driver circuit DC 89 A causes release of the clamp 240 Thus, if the operator releases the first pedal before continuing the procedure, the clamp 240 will be raised, since the flip flop f 92 B will be reset by the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch.

The operation of the label clamp 300 is very similar to that described in connection with the fabric clamp 240 Before actuation of the Pedal Clamp No 2 Switch, the input 2 of optoisolator OP 77 is connected to ground through the normally closed contact of the switch, and the input 13 of flip flop 1178 A from the isolator is thus lo.

Upon further depression of the first pedal subsequent to actuation of the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch, the Pedal Clamp No 2 Switch breaks contact with the terminal connected to input 2 of optoisolator OP 77, and, accordingly, the input 13 of flip flop ff 78 A is set hi In addition, the actuated Pedal Clamp No 2 Switch makes contact with the terminal connected to input 2 of optoisolator OP 76, such that the input 2 of the optoisolator is connected to ground.

Thus, the flip flop fi 78 A is set by a lo condition at its input 9, resulting in a hi state at output 8 of flip flop ff 78 A and ipnut 12 of NOR gate N 09 OC Accordingly, the output of gate N 09 OC and the corresponding input to an open collector driving circuit DC 89 B are set lo, resulting in application of full pressure to the air cylinder 274 and closure of the label clamp 300 due to the signal Clamp No 2 Cmd from the driver circuit DC 89 B Conversely, if the input to driver circuit DC 89 B is set hi, the label clamp 300 is released by the output signal Clamp No 2 Cmd from the driver circuit DC 19 B It will be seen that all inputs to NOR gates N 09 OB and N 09 OC are reset in a lo condition by the flip flops ff 92 B, 978 A, and f 190 A during initialization of tht control system Thus, the clamps are raised until the first foot pedal is depressed.

In case only one movable clamp is utilized on the machine it is not necessary to use the circuitry associated with the Pedal Clamp 70 No 2 Switch Thus, only the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch is provided which may be included in the same pedal with the Pedal Go Switch, but it is not necessary to change the circuit, since the part of the circuit 75 which may be connected to the Pedal Clamp No 2 Switch remains idle Accordingly, the control system may be used in conjunction with one or two clamps, as desired.

After actuation of both Pedal Clamp 80 Switches, the operator depresses the second pedal to request start of the sewing operation, and the actuated Pedal Go Switch makes contact with the normally open contact connected to input 2 of optoisolator 85 OP 96, connecting this terminal to ground through the switch As a result, the output of optoisolator OP 96 and corresponding input 1 of flip flop ff 92 A are set lo As discussed above, the signal Clamp Switch Off 90 N has been set hi through actuation of the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch, and both inputs 4 and 5 of the NAND gate in flip flop ff 92 A are hi, resulting in a lo signal on input 11 of NOR gate N 082 A It is noted 95 at this point that flip flop ff 92 A is not reset until the operator releases the first pedal after actuation of the Pedal Go Switch, at which time the Pedal Clamp No 1 Switch is placed in its normal configuration, result 100 ing in a lo state for the signal Clamp Switch Off-N This condition assures that the operator must release the first pedal before the next sewing operation.

Until the clamps 240 and 300 are fully 105 locked in place, the signal Clamp Sense from the normally open contact of the Clamp Sense Switch 308 is disconnected from ground, and the output of optoisolator OP 95 is hi at this time When both clamps 110 are placed in their proper position, the Clamp Sense Switch connects its normally open contact to ground, and the Clamp Sense Signal becomes lo, resulting in a lo signal at output 5 of optoisolator OP 95 and input 115 12 of NOR gate N 082 A Accordingly, when both the Clamp Sense Switch and Pedal Go Switch are actuated, the output 13 of NOR gate N 082 A goes hi, and differentiator circuit 506, comprising a capacitor C 11 O and 120 resistor R 104, generates a positive pulse as an input to inverter 191 A and AND gate A 66 A at its input 1 The inverter 191 A inverts the positive pulse to a lo pulse as the signal Cond Go-P 125 During initialization, the output 4 of flip flop f 19 OA and the corresponding signal Clamp Mode-OP were set hi by the signal Reset-N Accordingly, a hi condition is established at input 2 of AND gate A 66 A 130 1,570,244 by the Clamp Mode-OP signal which passes through the delay circuit 508.

Referring now to Fig 21 d, initialization of flip flop f 821 A by Reset-N resets its output 8 and the signal Basic Home-P to a lo condition Thus, as shown in Fig 21 f, a lo condition is established at input 5 of the NOR gate N 082 B during initialization.

As shown, a plurality of temperature sensors or switches 51, 52, 53, and 54 on the motor drive heat sinks are connected in series to power source Vcc is connected through the the power source Vcc Accordingly, the switches 51 to 54 and resistor R 100 to the inverter I 9 i B The normal state at the input of the inverter 191 B is thus hi, resulting in a lo state at input 6 of NOR gate N 082 B and as the signal Overtemp-P The sensors 51 to 54 monitor the temperature of the power transistors which feed the motor coils, and are utilized to save the drive circuits in the event of an out of temperature condition If an out of temperature condition exists for any of these sensors, the contact of the sensor opens, thus disconnecting the power source Vcc from the resistor R 100, such that the input to inverter 191 B goes lo and resulting in a hi signal for Overtemp-P The hi condition at the input of the driver circuit DC 88 A results in a hi state for the signal Overtemp LED which lights the Overtemp LED lamp on the front panel, as shown in Fig 21 m.

The signal Overtemp-P is utilized to protect the system, as will be described below.

Assuming that the temperature sensors indicate a satisfactory temperature condition, then both inputs 5 and 6 of NOR gate N 028 B will be lo, and the output signal from NOR gate NO 28 B, which passes through delay circuit 510, is hi, as well as input 13 of AND gate A 66 A Thus, both inputs 2 and 13 of AND gate A 66 A are in a hi condition, and the positive pulse at input 1 of the AND gate is passed through the gate to input 1 of NAND gate NA 78 B. The signal NTB Mode-OP indicates the condition of the Needle Thread Break Sensor 312, and is set low in the event of a broken thread, such that the output of NAND gate NA 78 B is held hi Conversely, if the thread has not broken, the signal NTB Mode-OP is hi to indicate a proper condition for the thread, and the positive pulse at input 1 of NAND gate NA 78 B is passed through and inverted by the gate Thus, a lo pulse is formed as the signal Start Pulse-N, and the lo pulse is again inverted by the inverter I 91 C to a positive pulse as the signal Start Pulse-P The positive or hi pulse presented at input 6 of flip flop 090 A sets the flip flop with its output 4 being set lo and its output 1 set hi Accordingly, the signal Clamp Mode-OP is set to a lo condition, and after a delay through delay circuit 508, the signal establishes a lo condition at input 2 of AND gate A 66 A to inhibit the gate at thistime Since the signal Clamp Mode-l P has been set to a hi condition, the outputs of NOR gates NO 9 OB and N 090 C are retained 70 lo, and the fabric and label clamps are maintained in their locked position by the current setting of the flip flop ff 9 OA.

The signal Overtemp-P is connected to input 5 of AND gate A 78 C, while the signal 75 Clamp Mode-OP is connected to input 4 of the same gate As noted above, the signal Clamp Mode-OP was set lo by the flip flop ff 9 OA, and remains in a lo condition until the signal End of Final Cut-N 80 goes lo at a later time Accordingly, the input to the driver stage Q 2 is lo during the current setting of the flip flop ff 9 OA The driver stage Q 2 handles a bus in the drive circuits which may disenable the pre 85 drivers and final drivers of the motors If an over temperature condition is sensed by switches 51 to 54, the signal Overtemp-P is set hi, as dicussed above Once the input to the driver stage Q 2 is 90 set hi, the Drive Signal Grd-N is essentially grounded to disenable the predrivers and final drivers of the motors However, it is desired to finish the current sewing operation before disenabling the motors, 95 and the signal Clamp Mode-Op is not set hi until the End of Final Cut-N signal is received, which resets the flip flop #9 OA.

Thus, when the signal Clamp Mode-Op is set hi by flip flop f 19 OA, the output of 100 AND gate A 78 C and the corresponding input to the driver stage Q 2 go hi to disenable the predrivers and final drivers of the motors and prevent damage to the motors in an overtemperature condition At the 105 same time, the change of state of flip flop ff 9 OA releases both clamps, assuming that the operator has removed her foot from the first pedal, since all the inputs to NOR gates NO 90 B and NO 90 C are lo, and the 110 inputs to driver circuits DC 89 A and DC 89 B are thus hi.

As shown in Fig 21 g, during initialization Reset-N resets flip flop ff 39 A, such that output 10 of the flip flop is reset hi, and 115 the signal End of Program Mode-l P is reset lo The hi signal at output 10 of flip flop ff 39 A passes through delay circuit 512 and establishes a hi condition at input 10 of NAND gate NA 54 A As discussed above, 120 the signal Start Pulse-N is initially hi, and the signal Address Clear-P is thus initially io after initialization of the system However, the lo pulse for the signal Start PulseN causes a positive or hi pulse to be formed 125 at the output of gate NA 54 A as the signal Address Clear-P Of course, the signal Start Pulse-N returns to its hi condition momentarily The signal Start Pulse-P presented to flip flop ff 39 A is a positive pulse, 130 23.

24 1,570,244 24 and does not change the state of the flip flop at this time Accordingly, a hi pulse is formed as the signal Address Clear-P, both inputs to NAND gate NA 54 A and then hi, and the signal Address Clear-P is then held lo.

As illustrated in Fig 21 a, the positive pulse for the signal Address Clear-P resets flip flop #ff 130 A, such that the extend terminal is reset to a hi condition Also, the signal Address Clear-P is inverted by inverter I 131 A in order that a lo pulse is presented at the Clear inputs of address registers or counters AR 1 and AR 2 to clear the register to zero As noted above, the signal Address Clear-P then returns to a lo state.

The signal Start Pulse-N is also utilized to start operation of the homing mode As shown in Fig 21 h, since the signal End of Program Mode-l P has been set lo, the signal End of Final Cut-N and input 4 of NAND gate NA 32 A is hi Initially, the signal Start Pulse-N was hi, and, accordingly, the signal Homing Set-P from gate NA 32 A was initially lo, while the inverted signal Homing Set-N was initially hi However, the lo pulse for the signal Start PulseN results in a positive or hi pulse as the signal Homing Set-P, and the inverter I 19 A forms a lo pulse as the signal Homing SetN When the signal Start Pulse-N returns to hi, the signals Homing Set-P and Homing Set-N returns to their lo and hi states, respectively.

As shown in Fig 21 e, the lo pulse Homing Set-N triggers single-shot S 522 A, and the single-shot times out after a delay which is longer than that required to complete the homing mode unless a fault should occur When the single-shot times out, the Q bar output of the single-shot goes from lo to hi, and the differentiator circuit 514 generates a positive pulse which is input to NOR gate NO 9 A A lo pulse is formed at the output of this gate as the signal Homing Clear-N, which is utilized to intiaiize the homing circuitry Thus, in the event that a mishap should occur during the homing mode and the homing mode is not completed, the Homing Clear-N signal will stop the homing mode and prevent possible damage to the system or machine.

The lo pulse Homing Set-N is utilized to start the basic homing mode as follows As shown in Fig 21 d, the signal Homing Set-N sets flip flop #21 A with its output Basic Home-P hi and Basic Home-N lo The signal Basic Home-N is inverted by inverter I 19 B, and when the inverted signal goes from lo to hi upon setting of flip flop #ff 21 A by Homing Set-N, a positive pulse is generated by differentiator circuit 516 The positive pulse is inverted by inverter I 19 A as a lo pulse for the signal Pri Home Dir Set-N.

As illustrated in Fig 21 e, the lo pulse signal Pri Home Dir Set-N is connected to the inputs of NAND gates NA 100 A and NA 100 B, such that hi pulse signals are output from the gates to the D-type flip flops 70 J 99 A and #f 99 B, respectively The flip flops f 99 A and ff 99 B are utilized to establish direction for the X and Y coordinates, as will be described in detail below.

As shown in Fig 21 f, the positive signal 75 Basic Home-P is connected to input 5 of NOR gate NO 82 B, such that a delayed lo condition will be obtained at input 13 of AND gate A 66 A As discussed above, when either of the inputs of AND gate A 66 A 80 go lo, the signal Start Pulse-N returns to hi, and the signal Start Pulse-P returns to lo.

However, delays are associated with each of the hi inputs to AND gate A 66 A The decay of the positive pulse at input 1 of 85 gate A 66 A is sufficiently long, and the delays in circuits 508 and 510 are sufficiently long, such that the inputs of gate A 66 A do not immediately return to lo, and the signal Start Pulse-N, although termed a pulse, 90 remains lo for a selected period of time.

The period of time selected is sufficiently long for the signal Homing Set-P, which was formed responsive to the lo pulse Start Pulse-N, to remain hi while the signal Basic 95 Home-N is set lo by flip flop #f 21 A in Fig.

21 d Accordingly, the signal Homing Set-P is hi and the signal Basic Home-N is lo during a period time until Start Pulse-N returns to its hi condition and Homing Set 100 P returns to lo.

Accordingly, as shown in Fig 21 g, during this time the hi value for the signal Homing Set-P, which is input to NOR gate NO 43 A, results in a lo condition at input 9 of OR 105 gate 043 B Also, the signal Basic Home-N is lo at this time, and the simultaneous lo signals input to this OR gate cause a lo condition at input 9 of NAND gate NA 55 A.

Thus, the input 11 of NOR gate NO 44 A is 110 hi, resulting in a low condition or pulse as the signal Start Run-N At this time the signal Aux Home Run-P is lo, and, accordingly, when the signal Homing Set-P returns to its lo condition, the input 9 of gate 043 B 115 goes hi, the input 9 of gate NA 55 A goes hi, the input 11 of gate NO 44 A goes lo, and the signal Start Run-N returns to its hi condition It may be readily determined that the remaining inputs to gate NA 55 A are hi and 120 the other input to the gate NO 44 A is lo at this time.

As illustrated in Fig 21 d, during initialization the signal Reset-N rests the X and Y run flip flops f 21 B and f 32 B, respectively, 125 with the signals X Run-N and Y Run-N in a hi condition, and with the signals X Run-P and Y Run-P in a lo condition When the lo pulse is formed as the signal Start RunN, the pulse is inverted by inverter I 19 C, 130 1,570,244 1,570,244 such that a hi pulse is presented at input 2 of NOR gate NO 20 A and input 5 of NOR gate NO 20 B The signals X Run SetP and Y Run Set-P are lo at this time, and a lo pulse is thus output from the gates NO 20 A and NO 20 B to the flip flops fl 21 B and #f 32 B, respectively, to set the flip flops wih the signals X Run-N and Y Run-N being lo and the signals X Run-P and Y Run-P hi.

As illustrated in Fig 21 i, during initialization the lo signal for Reset-N is inverted by inverter I 24 F, and the resulting hi signal is connected to an input of a NOR gate in each of the following X and Y pulse inhibit flip flops: #f 3 A, #f 3 B, f 14 A, /j 4 B, f 115 A, g 15 B, #27 A and if 27 B Accordingly, each of the above flip flops are reset by the positive signal, such that the following corresponding signal outputs of the various flip flops are set hi: X Decode 4 Plus-N, Yc Pulse Inhibit-N, Xb Pulse Inhibit-N, Y Decode 4 Plus-N, Xc Pulse Inhibit-N, Yb Pulse Inhibit-N, Xa Pulse Inhibit-N, and Ya Pulse Inhitit It may be determined that the other inputs to the X and Y inhibit flip flops are low at this time, by tracing the signals from the differentiator circuits 518 and 520, through inverters I 50 B and I 50 D, and the NOR gates NO 14 A, NO 14 B, NO 14 C, NO 14 D, NO 26 A, NO 26 B, NO 26 C, and NO 26 D to the flip flops f 13 A, f/3 B f 4 A, f 14 B, #f 15 A, #1 15 B, fi 27 A, and U 27 B. As previously discussed in connection Figs 21 e and 21 c the signals LS Shift-N was initialized in a hi condition, such that the square wave signal LS Osc-N is at the relatively fast rate of 850 cycles per second.

As illustrated in Fig 21 j, the signal LS Osc-N is inverted by the inverter I 67 A, and the inverted signal is differentiated by the differentiator circuit 522 Accordingly, a series of pulses are generated by the circuit 522 at the leading edge of the square pulses in the inverted signal from inverter 167 A The generated hi pulses are then inverted by inverter I 67 B to form a train of lo pulses Since the signals X Run-N and Y Run-N were set lo by the X and Y run flip flops, the lo pulse train from inverter I 67 B is passed through the NOR gates NO 80 A and NO 104 A and inverted by the gates to trains of narrow positive pulses as the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P Thus, the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P are each of series of narrow positive pulses which correspond in time to the trailing edge of the square wave signal LS Osc-N, and at the relatively fast speed of 850 cycles/second.

Since formation of the signals X ComboN and Y Combo-N, which are utilized for driving the X and Y stepping motors, will be described in detail below when describing operation of the machine under program control, the generation of these signals during the homing mode will be only briefly described at present As shown in Fig 21 k, 70 the pulse train X Count Pulse-P is connected to pin 2 of single-shot S 528 A and as one input to NAND gate NA 5 A, while the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is connected to pin 10 of single-shot S 540 A and as one 75 input to NAND gate NA 29 A.

The signal X Run-P is inverted twice by inverters I 17 A and I 17 B When the signal X Run-P goes from lo to hi, the corresponding signal output from inverter I 17 B 80 is differentiated by differentiator circuit 524 to generate a positive pulse and set flip flop if 16 A with its output 1 lo Accordingly, pin 1 of the single-shot S 528 A is set lo by the flip flop to enable the single-shot The 85 single-shot S 528 A will then be triggered by the first positive pulse from the signal X Count Pulse P on pin 2 of the single-shot, and the Q output of the single-shot immediately goes hi Until the single-shot S 528 A 90 times out, the Q bar output of single-shot S 528 B remains hi, and the same positive pulse in the signal X Count Pulse-P is passed through the NAND gate NA 5 A and is inverted by the gate to form a lo pulse 95 at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A This lo pulse at the input of gate NA 31 A may be designated X Pulse No 1 of the signal X Count Pulse-P.

As previously discussed, both signals XB 100 Pulse Inhibit-N and LS Shift-N were initialized in a hi condition, and the input to pin 1 of single-shot S 56 A from NAND gate NA 5 B is lo to enable this single-shot.

Accordingly, when the single-shot S 528 A is 105 first triggered and its Q output goes hi, the single-shot S 56 A is triggered at pin 2 by the signal The Q bar output of single-shot S 56 A is thus set lo, and when the singleshot times out its Q bar output goes from 110 lo to hi, and a positive pulse is generated b I, the differentiator circuit 526 The delay time for the single-shot S 56 A and the corresponding time for generation of the pulse by circuit 526 is selected at a pre 115 determined time after pulse No 1 of X Count Pulse-P The pulse generated by differentiator circuit 526 is inverted by inverter T 5 f A to form a lo pulse at inpout 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A, and will be 120 designated an XA Pulse.

Before the single-shot S 56 A times out, the single-shot S 528 A which triggered the single-shot S 56 A, times out, and the resulting lo signal on its Q output triggers single 125 shot S 528 B at its pin 9 The O O outtut of the triggered single-shot S 598 B which is set hi and is delayed slightly by delay circuit 228 resets fli D flop #1 i 6 A whbch forms N hi signal at its output 1 to inhibit the single 130 1,570,244 shot S 528 A at pin 1 and prevent further triggering of this single-shot by the signal X Count Pulse-P at this time Meanwhile, the Q bar output of triggered single-shot S 528 B goes lo and inhibits pulses from the signal X Count Pulse-P from passing through NAND gate NASA until single-shot S 528 B times out The delay associated with singleshot S 528 B is such that the second and third pulses of the signal X Count Pulse-P are inhibited, and the pulse XA Pulse occurs during this time Subsequently, when the single-shot S 528 B times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the later pulses from X Count Pulse-P are passed through and inverted by NAND gate NASA as lo pulses at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A Accordingly, the lo pulses formed at inputs 10 and 11 of gate NA 31 A are the X Pulse No 1 of the signal X Count Pulse-P, the pulse XA Pulse, which occurs during the inhibited second and third pulses of the signal X Count Pulse-P, and the fourth pulse and subsequent pulses of the signal X Count Pulse-P.

The hi signal Basic Home-P is inverted by inverter I 7 A, the output of inverter 17 A passes through delay circuit 530, and the delayed signal is again inverted by inverter 17 B to form the hi signal Homing ModeOP which is connected to pin 9 of singleshot S 56 B The hi signal Homing Mode-OP thus inhibits this single-shot, and its Q bar output remains hi so long as the signal Basic Home-P is hi Accordingly, the signal from differentiator circuit 532 to input 13 of NAND gate NA 5 C remains lo, and the output of gate NASC to input 9 of NAND gate NA 31 A remains hi during this time to inhibit formation of an XB Pulse.

The other lo pulses formed at inputs 10 and 11 of gate NA 31 A, as previously discussed, are inverted by the gate, and are supplied as a hi pulse train at input 2 of OR gate 082 C, and are passed through the OR gate as positive pulses at pin 2 of singleshot S 568 A Each of the positive pulses at input 2 of this single-shot triggers the single shot The single-shot S 568 A regenerates each of the positive pulses, and forms a corresponding train of lo regenerated or wider pulses at its Q bar output to form the signal X Combo-N, which comprises a series of regenerated lo pulses utilized to direct movement of the X stepping motor.

Since the signal Basic Home-N was set lo, the output of AND gate A 5 D at pin 10 of single-shot S 568 B is lo, thus inhibiting this single-shot Accordingly, the signal from differentiator circuit 534 to input 3 of OR gate 082 C is lo during the period of time that Basic Home-N is lo, thus preventing formation of an XC Pulse at pin 2 of singleshot S 568 A.

Thus, the lo pulse train X Combo-N has been formed for the X stepping motor during the basic home mode This signal comprises the regenerated X Pulse No 1 of the signal X Count Pulse-P, the XA Pulse, and the fourth and subsequent pulses of the 70 signal X Count Pulse-P The formation of the signal Y Combo-N for control of the Y stepping motor is very similar, and thus will only be described briefly.

As noted above, the signal Y Count Pulse 75 P is connected to pin 10 of single-shot S 540 A and the NAND gate NA 29 A The hi signal Y Run-P is inverted twice by the inverters 117 C and 117 D, and the signal change from inverter I 17 D is differentiated 80 by differentiator circuit 536 to generate a pulse and set flip flop #16 B with its output 13 lo to enable single-shot S 540 A at its pin 9 on receipt of the first pulse on Y Count Pulse-P The Q output of triggered 85 single-shot S 540 A triggers the single-shot S 530 A at pin 10 for generation of a YA Pulse The pulse of the signal Y Count Pulse-P which triggers single-shot S 540 A is passed through and inverted by NAND 90 gate NA 29 A, and is presented as a lo pulse at input 5 of NAND gate NA 31 B, identified as Y Pulse No 1 As previously described in connection with the X portion of the circuit, the single-shot S 540 B is triggered at 95 pin 1 when the single-shot S 540 A times out.

The Q output of triggered single-shot S 540 B passes through delay circuit 538 and resets flip flop fi 16 B to inhibit the single-shot S 540 A at pin 9 The Q bar output of 100 triggered single-shot S 540 B inhibits the NAND gate NA 29 A during the second and third pulses of the signal Y Count Pulse-P to prevent passage of pulses through the gate at this time, but permits the fourth 105 and subsequent pulses of the signal Y Count Pulse-P to pass through the gate, while inverting the pulses, when the single-shot S 540 B times out, as previously described.

When the triggered single-shot S 530 A 110 times out and its O bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 540 generates a hi pulse which is inverted by inverter 156 B and presented as a lo pulse, identified as a YA Pulse, at input 4 of NAND gate 115 NA 31 B Thus, the lo pulses formed at inputs 4 and 5 of gate NA 31 B are inverted and passed through the gate to input 9 of OR gate 082 D The positive pulses are passed through the OR gate to pin 10 of single 120 shot S 569 A, where the pulses are regenerated and formed as a train of corresponding lo pulses at the Q bar output of the single-shot as the signal Y Combo-N for control of the Y stenning motor 125 The single-shot S 530 A, which forms the YA Pulse was enabled bv the hi conditions of the signals LS Shift-N and Ya Pulse Inhibit-N which are connected to the inputs of NAND gate NA 29 B, thus forming a lo 130 1,570,244 signal at pin 9 of single-shot S 530 A However, formation of YB and YC Pulses areinhibited at this time, in a manner as previously described The lo signal Basic HomeN is connected to input 10 of AND gate A 29 C, resulting in a lo input at pin 2 of single-shot S 569 B Accordingly, the Q Bar output of single-shot S 569 B remains hi, and the differentiator circuit 542 is prevented from forming a YC Pulse which would otherwise pass through OR gate 082 D to pin 10 of the single-shot S 569 A.

As previously discussed, the signal Homing Mode-OP was set hi resulting from a hi signal Basic Home-P The signal Homing Mode-OP is connected to pin 1 of singleshot S 530 B to inhibit this single-shot Accordingly, the Q bar output of single-shot S 530 B remains hi, and the differentiator circuit 542 is prevented from forming a pulse for NAND gate NA 29 D, which would otherwise pass a lo YB Pulse to input 3 of NAND gate NA 31 B. Accordingly, the pulse trains for the signals X Combo-N and Y Combo-N during the homing mode are based primarily on the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P, respectively, except for modification of the pulse train by the XA and YA Pulses The pulse trains X Combo-N and Y Combo-N are separately supplied to the X and Y stepping motors, respectively, until crossings in the X and Y directions, as described below.

As illustrated in Fig 21 e, the X Homing Sensor Signal from the homing sensor on the X axis is connected to a Schmitt trigger ST 98 A The Schmitt trigger sharpens the edges of the sensor signal and inverts the signal, after which it is presented at the D input of the D-type flip-flop #99 A and input 2 of the exclusive OR gate Ei Oll A.

The flip flop #f 99 A operates as follows.

When the CLK input of the flip flop goes hi, the Q output of the flip flop is set continuously equal to the signal at its D input during the time that the CLK input remains hi When the CLK input returns to lo further change of the Q output is prevented until the CLK input again returns to hi Accordingly, when the CLK input goes lo, the Q output of the flip flop is set equal to the last value of its D input at the time the CLK input goes lo Conversely, the Q bar output of the flip flop is set equal to the last inverted D input value at the time the CLK input goes lo.

As previously discussed, during initialization of the basic homing mode, the signal Pri Home Dir Set-N was formed as a lo pulse which resulted in formation of a positive pulse at the CLK input of flip flop #99 A Accordingly, when the signal Pri Home Dir Set-N returns to its hi condition, and the CLK input of the flip flop returns from hi to lo, the Q output of the flip flop is set at the last value of the D input which is indicative of the present location in the X direction as sensed by the X Homing Sensor Thus, for example, if the 70 X Homing Sensor Signal was lo when the lo pulse Pri Home Dir Set-N is received, the inverted output from Schmitt trigger ST 98 A to the D input of flip flop f#99 A is hi, thus resulting in a setting of the Q 75 output of the flip flop hi and of the Q bar output lo The Q and Q bar outputs of the flip flop will remain in this condition until another positive pulse is recevied at the CLK output 80 The signal X Home Dir-P from the Q output of flip flop f 199 A is utilized to specify the direction which the X stepping motor must be driven to move the work holder to its home position in the X direc 85 tion The signal X Home Dir-P is connected to input 4 of AND gate A 133 B, whereas the signal Basic Home-P is connected to input 3 of the same gate Since the signal Basic Home-P is hi during this time, the signal X 90 Home Dir-P will be reflected at input 6 of NOR gate NO 134 C The lo signal Basic Home-N is connected to input 2 of the AND gate A 133 A, such that input 5 of NOR gate N 0134 C is also lo Thus, the 95 signal at input 6 of NOR gate N 0134 C is inverted as the signal X Direction If the signal X Home Dir-P is hi, the signal X Direction is lo, and, conversely, if the signal X Home Dir-P is lo, the signal X Direction 100 is hi It will be apparent that the polarity of the signal X Direction is indicative of the signal from the X Homing Sensor at the time the basic homing mode was initialized, and is thus utilized for the X 105 stepping motor to control the correct direction for driving the X stepping motor to the home position along the X axis during the basic home mode.

As shown, the O bar output of flip flop 110 ff 99 A is connected to input 1 of the exclusive OR gate Ei Oll A As previously noted, the output from the Schmitt trigger ST 98 A is connected to input 2 of the same gate When the Q and Q bar outputs are set 115 by the CLK input of the flip flop, the inverted Q bar output of the flip flop will be the inverse of input 2 of exclusive OR gate EOO 1 A Accordingly, when the outputs of the flip flop are set, the two inputs of the 120 exclusive OR gate are set at opposite polarities The exclusive OR gate EO 1 Ol A has a hi output so long as its inputs are at opposite polarity, but the output of this gate goes lo when its inputs are the same 125 Thus, the inputs of the exclusive OR gate will remain of opposite polarity as the clamp is being driven toward its home position and until the output of the Schmitt trigger ST 98 A reverses polarity at the time 130 1,570,244 of crossing on the X axis, as sensed by the X Homing Sensor, at which time both inputs to the exclusive OR gate become the same.

At this point in time, the output of exclusive OR gate EO O 01 A goes Jo Since the signal Basic Home-N is lo at one input of NOR gate NO 71 A and the other input from the exclusive OR gate now goes lo, the output of NOR gate NO 71 A goes from lo to hi, and the differentiator circuit 544 generates a positive pulse.

As previously discussed, during initialization the signal LS Shift-N of flip-flop f#45 A is set hi by the signal Reset-N The output 6 of flip flop ff 45 A is lo, since both inputs 4 and 5 of the flip flop are hi The his ignal at input 5 of the flip flop results from the losi gnal from differentiator circuit 546 which is inverted by inverter I 46 A The lo output from flip flop f 45 A is inverted to a hi condition by inverter I 46 B, such that input 5 of NOR gate NO 71 B and input 2 of NAND gate NA 60 A are both hi The hi signal at input 5 of NOR gate NO 71 B prevents setting of flip flop f 71 C by the positive pulse from differentiator circuit 544 However, the differentiator circuit 544 is connected to input 1 of NAND gate NA 60 A, and the positive pulse is inverted by this NAND gate, since input 2 of the gate is hi at this time and the resulting lo pulse is presented at input 10 of NAND gate NA 73 A The NAND gate NA 73 A in turn inverts the lo pulse to a positive pulse which is presented at input 1 of AND gate A 132 A Since the signal Basic Home-P, which is hi, is connected to input 2 of AND gate A 132 A, the positive pulse is presented at input 1 of NOR gate NO 134 A The signal Basic Home-N, which is lo, is connected to input 4 of AND gate A 132 B, and the other input 2 of NOR gate N 0134 A is thus lo.

Accordingly, the NOR gate N 0134 A inverts the positive pulse at its input 1, and forms a lo pulse as the signal X Stop-N.

As shown in Fig 21 d, the signal X StopN is connected to the X run flip flop f 121 B, and the lo pulse X Stop-N resets the flip flop with its output signals X Run-N hi and X run-P lo As shown in Fig 21 l, the hi signal X Run-N sets the output of NOR gate NO 80 A lo Accordingly, the signal X Count Pulse-P, which was utilized to form the pulse train as the signal X Combo-N for control of the X stepping motor, goes lo thus stopping the X stepping motor Since the motors are driven in the basic home mode at the relatively fast rate of 850 cycles/ second, the work holder is moved slightly past its home position in the basic home mode before being stopped.

The operation of the system for control of the work holder in the Y direction is very similar to that described in connection with the X direction Thus, as shown in Fig 21 e, a signal indicative of the position in the Y direction is developed by Schmitt trigger ST 98 B at the D input of flip flop j J 99 B from the Y Homing Sensor Signal of the Y Homing Sensor The lo pulse Pri 70 Home Dir Set-N is passed through NAND gate NA 1 OOB as a hi pulse to the CLK input of the flip flop ff 99 B to establish the Q and Q bar outputs of the flip flop during initialization accord 75 ing to the last state of the D input.

The Q output of the flip flop, designated Y Home Dir-P, is connected to input 8 of the AND gate A 133 D, and since the input 7 of this gate is connected to the hi signal Basic 80 Home-P, the NOR gate N 0134 D inverts the signal from Y Home Dir-P as the signal Y Direction The other AND gate A 133 C is connected to the lo signal Basic Home-N, and, accordingly, the input 7 of NOR gate 85 N 0134 D is also lo at this time The signal Y Direction is utilized to control the direction in which the Y stepping motor moves the work holder in the Y direction, in a manner similar to that described in con 90 nection with the signal X Direction used for direction control of the X stepping motor.

When the output from the Schmitt trigger ST 98 B changes state at the time of crossing along the Y axis, the inputs to the 95 exclusive OR gate E Ol Ol B become the same, and a lo condition is established atinput 3 of NOR gate N 086 A Since the signal Basic Home-N is lo, the output of NOR gate N 086 A goes from lo to hi, and 100 a positive pulse is generated at input 2 of NAND gate NA 73 B by differentiator circuit 548 Since the input 1 of NAND gate NA 73 B connected to the output of inverter 146 B is hi, a lo pulse is formed at input 4 105 of NAND gate NA 73 C This gate inverts the pulse, and a positive pulse is formed at input 8 of the AND gate A 132 D Since the other input 7 of this gate is connected to the hi signal Basic Home-P, the positive 110 pulse is inverted by NOR gate N 0134 B as a lo pulse for the signal Y Stop N The input 6 of AND gate A 132 C is connected to the lo signal Bisic Home-N, and the other input 3 of NOR gate N 0134 B is Jo 115 at this time.

As shown in Fig 21 d, the lo pulse Y Ston-N is connected to the Y run flip flop ff 32 B, and resets this flip flop with its output signals Y Run-P lo and Y Run-N hi As 120 illustrated in Fig 21 l, the hi signal Y RunN connected to NOR gate NO 104 A results in formation of a lo condition for the signal Y Count Pulse-P to stop the Y stenping motor Of course, the Y stepping 125 motor may be stopped prior to, subseouent to, or at the same time as the X stepping motor depending on the respective times of crossing in the X and Y axes.

When a change of direction is indicated 130 1,570,244 by the X and Y Homing Sensor Signals, and both X and Y run flip flops are reset, resulting in discontinued movement of the clamps in the X and Y directions, both inputs to NOR gate N 020 C are reset lo, as shown in Fig 21 d As the second of the inputs to gate N 020 C goes lo, the output of this gate goes hi and differentiator circuit 550 generates a positive pulse, which is inverted to a lo pulse by inverter 119 D with the lo pulse being presented at input 12 of NOR gate NO 20 D Since the signal Basic HomeN is lo, the gate N 020 D inverts the pulse at its output as a positive pulse for the signal Mode Pulse-P, which is utilized to select the auxiliary and subauxiliary homing modes.

As shown in Fig 21 e, the signal Mode Pulse-P is connected to input 12 of NAND gate NA 73 D and input 9 of NAND gate NA 45 B As shown, the output of inverter 146 B, which is hi, is connected to input 13 of NAND gate NA 73 D, while the output of inverter 146 C, which is lo, is connected to input 10 of NAND gate NA 45 B Since the input 10 to gate NA 45 B is lo at this time, the output of this gate to pin 9 of single-shot S 533 A is hi, and this singleshot is not triggered at this time.

However, since the input 13 to NAND gate NA 73 D is hi, the hi pulse for signal Mode Pulse-P is passed through and inverted by the gate The corresponding lo pulse from the output of gate NA 73 D is presented at pin 1 of the single-shot S 533 B which triggers the single-shot When the single-shot times out and its Q bar output goes hi, a positive pulse is generated by differentiator circuit 546 The pulse is inverted by the inverter 146 A as a lo pulse to set the flip flop 1145 A with its output signal LS Shift-N lo and its output 6 hi.

The hi signal at output 6 of the flip flop is delayed by delay circuit 552, and is then inverted by inverter 146 B to a lo state The lo output of inverter 146 B is inverted by inverter 146 C, and as the output from the latter inverter goes hi, the differentiator circuit 554 generates a positive pulse which triggers the single-shot S 559 A at its pin 2.

The positive pulse generated by differentiator circuit 554 is inverted by inverter I 46 D and the corresponding lo pulse from this inverter is presented at inputs of the NAND gates NA 100 A and NA 1 OOB as the signal Aux Set Pulse-N The corresponding positive pulses formed at the outputs of the NAND gates actuate the flip flops f 199 A and f 799 B at their CLK inputs to obtain new X and Y position data for the Q and Q bar outputs of the flip flops, as previously described.

The RC circuit associated with the singleshot S 559 A is such that the triggered singleshot undergoes a ten millisecond delay before it times out This delay is utilized to permit settling out of the X and Y stepping motors, and assures that the positional information is clocked into the flip flops f 899 A and g 99 B When the single-shot S 559 A times 70 out, the Q bar output of the single-shot goes hi, and differentiator circuit 556 generates a positive pulse as the signal Aux Home Run-P This signal initiates the auxiliary home mode of the system during which the 75 X and Y stepping motors are driven in the opposite direction from that in which they were driven during the basic home mode, since the Q outputs of flip flop f 899 A and fi 99 B are of different polarities than 80 when in the basic home mode, due to the crossings which took place along the X and Y axes during the basic home mode.

As shown in Fig 21 g, the positive pulse for the signal Aux Home Run-P connected 85 to NOR gate N 043 A results in formation of a lo pulse at input 9 of OR gate 043 B. Since the signal Basic Home-N is lo, a lo pulse is presented at input 9 of NAND gate NASSA, resulting in formation of a 90 positive pulse at input 11 of NOR gate N 044 A and a lo pulse as the signal Start Run-N.

As illustrated in Fig 21 d, the lo pulse Start Run-N sets the X and Y run flip flop 95 ft 2 l B and ft 32 B with their outputs X RunN and Y Run-N lo and with X Run-P and Y Run-P hi, as previously described As illustrated in Fig 21 c, the signal LS Shift-N is now lo, and the signal LS Osc-N is thus 100 a square wave signal at the relatively low speed of 425 cycles/second As discussed above, the low speed clock signal is utilized during the auxiliary and subauxiliary modes to permit a more precise final positioning 105 of the work holder at the home position.

As shown in Fig 21 j, since the signals X Run-N and Y Run-N have been set lo, the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P again formed from the signal LS 110 Osc-N, as described above, execept that the pulse trains formed are now at the relatively low speed of 425 cycles or pulses/ second As described above in connection with Fig 21 k, the regener 115 ated lo pulse trains X Combo-N and Y Combo-N for control of the X and Y stepper motors are again formed from the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P However, since the signal LS Shift 120 N is now lo, the outputs from NAND gates NA 5 B and NA 29 B to the single-shots S 56 A and 530 A are hi, thus inhibiting both singleshots Accordingly, the XA and YA Pulses are not formed during the auxiliary homing 125 mode, as well as the subauxiliary homing mode, and are inhibited by the signal LS Shift-N As before, the signals X Run-P and Y Run-P trigger the single-shots whirh inhibit the second and third pulses of the 130 1,570,244 signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count PulseP at the NAND gates NASA and NA 29 A, respectively Accordingly, the pulse train which is regenerated and formed by the single-shots S 568 A and S 569 A as the signals X Combo-N and Y Combo-N reflect the first pulse of the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P and the fourth and subsequent pulses of these signals, with the second and third pulses being inhibited.

The XB, XC, YB, and YC Pulses are inhibited during the auxiliary homing mode, as accomplished during the basic home mode.

Referring to Fig 21 e, when the direction indication from Schmitt trigger ST 98 A for the X direction changes to indicate a crossing in the X direction, the inputs to the exclusive OR gate EO O 01 A become the same, and result in a positive pulse being generated by differentiator circuit 544, as previously described It is noted that the signal Basic Home-N remains lo at this time Since the output from inverter 146 B is now lo, the output of NAND gate NA 60 A connected to input 10 of NAND gate NA 73 A is hi at this time, and the pulse is not passed through gate NA 60 A However, the positive pulse from differentiator circuit 544 is inverted by inverter 146 D, and a lo pulse is formed at input 6 of NOR gate N 071 B. Since the input 5 of gate NO 71 B from the output of inverter I 46 B is lo, the lo pulse formed at input 6 of this gate is inverted by the gate, and the positive pulse formed sets the flip flop ff 71 C with its output 13 in a lo condition.

The output QD of the four bit counter CT 58 is normally lo A hi signal from output 13 of flip flop #71 C clears the four bit counter to zero, and holds it in its cleared state with the output QD lo.

When the output 13 of flip flop ff 7 l C goes lo, the hold is released on the counter CT 58.

At this time, the CLK input of the counter, which is connected to the signal Homing LS Osc-P, is utilized to count the counter As previously described in connection with Fig.

21 c, since the signal LS Shift-N is now lo, the signal Homing LS Osc-P is a square wave at the relatively low rate of 425 cycles/ second When the counter CT 58 is counted by four pulses of the signal Homing LS Osc-P at the slow rate, the output QD of the counter goes from lo to hi, and a positive pulse is generated by the differentiator circuit 558.

The positive pulse from circuit 558 is inverted by inverter 146 F with the portion of the pulse beyond the threshold level being clipped, such that a narrow lo pulse is formed at input 9 of NAND gate NA 73 A.

The positive going edge of the narrow pulse is differentiated by differentiator circuit 560, such that a positive pulse is generated by the circuit 560 which resets the flip flop ff 71 C with its output 13 hi Accordingly, the hold flip flop ff 7 l C again clears the counter CT 58, and holds the counter in its cleared state with output QD lo until the 70 flip flop is again set Since the input 10 of NAND gate NA 73 A is hi, the narrow lo pulse at input 9 of the gate is inverted by the gate to a positive pulse which is passed through AND gate A 132 A to input 1 of 75 NOR gate NO 134 A It-is noted that the signal Basic Home-P connected to the other input of AND gate A 132 A is still hi at this time The NOR gate N 0134 A inverts the positive pulse to a lo pulse for the signal 80 X Stop-N As previously described in connection with Fig 21 d, the lo pulse X Stop-N resets the X run flip flop f 12 l B resulting in a hi signal X Run-N and a lo signal X Run-P As described in con 85 nection with Fig 21 j, the hi cond'ffion of X Run-N results in a lo value for the signal X Count Pulse-P, and movement of the clamps in the X direction is stopped.

It will be apparent that since movement 90 in the X direction is not terminated until four clock pulses after a change of direction or crossing as sensed by the X Homing Sensor, as accomplished by the counter CT 58 described in connection with Fig 21 e, 95 the clamps are moved in the X direction four steps past the location at which the sensor indicated a change in direction This follows since the signals X Count Pulse-P and Homing LS Osc-P are both synchronized 100 at the slow rate of 425 pulses/second The final location for the clamps in the X direction is thus precisely determined at the relatively slow rate and at precisely the four counts or steps past the location of crossing 105 determined by the X Homing Sensor Thus, the clamps are located at a position to prevent possible ambiguity of direction by the sensor in the event that it is necessary to move the clamps in the X direction during 110 the subauxiliary homing mode It will be apparent from the description which follows that after the combination of auxiliary and subauxiliary homing modes, the clamps will always be located at the same home position 115 for a given adjustment of the X and Y Homing Sensors.

The operation of the control system in terminating movement of the clamps in the Y direction is similar to that described 120 above in connection with X direction As illustrated in Fig 21 c, when a change of direction is indicated by the Y Homing Sensor and the Schmitt trigger ST 98 B, such that both inputs to the exclusive OR gate 125 E O l Ol B become the same, a positive pulse is generated by the differentiator circuit 548 Since the output of inverter 146 B is lo at this time, the output of NAND gate NA 73 B at input 4 of NAND gate NA 73 C 130 1,570,244 is hi The positive pulse generated by circuit 548 is inverted by the inverter 183 A, and is presented as a lo pulse at input 11 of NOR gate NO 86 B Since the input 12 of gate NO 86 B from inverter 146 B is lo, the lo pulse at input 11 is inverted by the gate to a positive pulse which sets flip flop fi 86 C.

The resulting lo condition at output 4 of this flip flop releases the hold on the four bit counter CT 87, and the signal Homing LS Osc-P counts the counter to 4 at which time the output QD of the counter goes hi.

In response, the differentiator circuit 562 generates a positive pulse which is inverted and clipped by the inverter 183 B to form a narrow lo pulse at input 5 of NAND gate NA 73 C The positive going edge of the lo pulse is differentiated by differentiator circuit 564, and a positive pulse is formed by the circuit which resets flip flop f 86 C with its output 4 hi to hold and clear the counter CT 87 The narrow lo pulse at input 5 of gate NA 73 C is inverted by the gate, and is then passed through AND gate A 132 D to input 4 of NOR gate NO 134 B The gate N 0134 B again inverts the pulse as a lo pulse for the signal Y Stop-N As previously described in connection with Fig 21 d, the lo pulse Y Stop-N resets the Y run flip flop ff 32 B, and resets the signals Y Run-P lo and Y Run-N hi As discussed in connection with Fig 21 j, the hi condition of signal Y Run-N presented at NOR gate NO 104 A clears the signal Y Count Pulse-P, and stops movement of the clamps in the Y direction Accordingly, movement of the clamps in the subauxiliary homing mode have been stopped in both directions As previously discussed, it is irrelevant whether the clamps are stopped first in the X or the Y direction.

As discussed above, positioning of the clamps along the X or Y axes is not completed during the auxiliary homing mode unless the position was approached from a specified direction in the auxiliary mode If the clamps were moved from the incorrect direction during the auxiliary mode for a given axis, a subauxiliary mode is entered for that axis or coordinate during which the clamps are moved in the specified direction to the final home position Accordingly, if the clamps were moved along both the X and Y coordinate directions during the auxiliary homing mode in the specified directions, the subauxiliary mode is not entered for either of the axes, and the clamps have been placed in their correct home position during the auxiliary mode.

Thus, in this case, the clamps have been moved by the stepping motors four steps past the location at which the sensors indicated a correct change of direction for both reference axes If the clamps were moved along either axis in the unspecified direction, the subauxiliary mode is entered for that axis If the clamps were moved along both coordinate directions in the unspecified directions during the auxiliary homing mode, the subauxiliary honing mode is entered 70 for both axes to move the clamps along both axes in the specified directions to the final home position.

A discussion of the transition from the auxiliary homing mode to subauxiliary horn 75 ing mode, if any, is described as follows.

When both stepping motors have been stopped in the auxiliary homing mode and both X and Y run flip flops f 121 B and ff 32 B have been reset by the signals X 80 Stop-N and Y Stop-N, as shown in Fig 21 d, the flip flops form a lo signal at both inputs of NOR gate NO 20 C, As previously described, when both inputs of the gate go lo, a positive pulse is generated as the signal 85 Mode Pulse-P.

Referring now to Fig 21 e, since the output of inverter 146 B is lo at this time, the output of NAND gate NA 73 D to the single-shot S 533 B is hi, thus inhibiting the 90 single-shot and preventing the signal Mode Pulse-P from triggering this single-shot.

However, the output of inverter I 46 C is now hi, and the positive pulse Mode PulseP is inverted by NAND gate NA 45 B, such 95 that the lo pulse formed at the gate output triggers single-shot S 533 A at pin 9 The triggered single shot then undergoes a delay of 10 milliseconds As previously described, the 10 millisecond delay permits the step 100 ping motors to settle out, for if the stepping motors are driven in an opposite direction while still undergoing relatively large oscillations, they may move in an incorrect direction when driven again When the single-shot 105 S 533 A times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 566 generates a positive pulse The positive pulse is presented at input 9 of AND gate All A, and the pulse is also inverted by inverter I 1 OB, 110 with a lo pulse being formed at input 2 of NOR gate NO 9 B. It is apparent that both the input 10 to AND gate All A and input 3 of NOR gate NO 9 B are lo at this time This follows 115 since both flip flops f 160 B and f#85 A were reset during initialization by the signal Reset-N, resulting in hi signals at the inputs of NAND gate NA 60 C Thus, the output of NAND gate NA 60 C is lo, and input 10 of 120 gate All A and input 3 of gate NO 9 B are both lo Accordingly, the hi pulse from differentiator circuit 566 is blocked at the AND gate All A by its lo input 10 However, the lo pulse at input 2 of NOR gate 125 NO 9 B is inverted and passed through the gate The resulting positive pulse is formed at input 1 of NAND gate NA 85 B, input 4 of NAND gate NA 85 CS, and pin 10 of the single-shot S 559 B 130 1,570,244 It will be seen that the Q bar output of flip flop f 199 A is connected through delay circuit 568 to input 2 of NAND gate NA 85 B, while the Q bar output of flip flop f J 99 B is connected through delay circuit 570 to input 5 of NAND gate NA 85 C As discussed above, the Q bar outputs of both flip flops were set at the beginning of the auxiliary homing mode, and provided a reference for the direction in which the X and Y stepping motors were driven during the auxiliary mode It is also noted that the flip flops 099 A and f 199 B have not been reset since the auxiliary homing mode was entered.

If the Q bar output of flip flop f 199 A is hi, the positive pulse at input 1 of NAND gate NA 85 B is passed through the gate and inverted to a lo pulse which sets flip flop U 60 B and initializes the start of subauxiliary homing mode for the X axis On the other hand, if the Q bar output of the flip flop f J 99 A is lo, the positive pulse is prevented from passing through gate NA 85 B, and the output of the gate remains hi, thus preventing initialization of the subauxiliary homing mode for the X axis.

Similarly, if the Q bar output of flip flon ff 99 B is hi, the positive pulse at input 4 of NAND gate NA 85 C is passed through and inverted by the gate, and the corresponding lo pulse sets flip flop f 185 A to initialize a subauxiliary homing mode on the Y axis.

On the other hand, if the Q bar output of flip flop f 99 B is lo, the positive pulse is blocked at NAND gate NA 85 C, thus preventing initialization of the auxiliary homing mode by the flip flop f 185 A for the Y axis.

Accordingly, a lo Q bar output of flip flop 1199 A indicates that the clamps approached the home position from the correct direction Thus, no further movement of the clamps in the X direction is needed, and the subauxiliary mode for the X axis is not entered Alternatively, if the Q bar output of flip flop f J 99 A is hi, this provides an indication that additional movement of the clamps along the X axis is necessary to obtain the correct home position in the X coordinate direction, and the subauxiliary mode for the X axis is then entered.

Similarly for the Y axis, a lo Q bar output of the flip flop f 199 B indicates that the clamps were driven in the correct direction during the auxiliary mode, and the subauxiliary homing mode is not entered.

Alternatively, if the Q bar output of flip flop ff 99 B is hi, the clamps were not moved during the auxiliary mode in the correct direction, and the subauxiliary mode is entered for the Y axis.

Assuming first, for purposes of description, that the Q bar outputs of both flip flops ff 99 A and f 199 B are lo, indicating that the clamps are at their correct home position and that the subauxiliary homing mode will not be entered for either axis, neither of the flip flops J 601 B nor fi 85 A are set.

Accordingly, output 11 of flip flop f 160 B and output 8 of flip flop fj 85 A remain in 70 their initialized hi state, and both inputs 4 and 5 of NAND gate NA 60 C and the inputs 3 and 4 of AND gate A 100 C are all hi.

The single-shot S 559 B, which is triggered at pin 10 by the positive pulse from NOR 75 gate NO 9 B, undergoes a 6 microsecond delay before it times out to allow suflicient time for the flip flops ff 60 B and #85 A to be set in the event that the subauxiliary mode will be entered on one or more axes When the 80 Q bar output of single-shot S 559 B times out and goes hi, the differentiator circuit 572 generates a positive pulse which is passed through AND gate A 1 OOC as a positive pulse due to the high 85 conditions at inputs 3 and 4 of this gate The positive pulse is inverted by NOR gate NO 9 C to form a lo pulse as the signal End Homing Pulse-N The use of the signal End Homing Pulse-N at the end of the 90 homing mode will be described in detail below.

The lo pulse from NOR gate NO 9 C is inverted by inverter h 1 OC, and the corresponding positive pulse is inverted by NOR 95 gate NO 9 A as a lo pulse for the signal Homing Clear-N, which is utilized to initialize the system for a subsequent homing mode Thus, the lo pulse signal Homing Clear-N resets the following flip flops: 100 f J 6 OB (Fig 21 e), 8185 A (Fig 21 e), f#45 A (Fig 21 e), and f#21 A (Fig 21 d) As shown in Fig 21 d, resetting of the flip flop f#21 A by the signal Homing Clear-N resets its output signals Basic Home-P lo and Basic 105 Home-N hi As illustrated in Fig 21 e, resetting of flip flop f 145 A results in a hi condition for the signal LS Shift-N, which results in operation of the system again at the fast clock rate of 850 cycles/second, 110 and a lo signal at the input of inverter I 46 B The remaining flip flops of the homing circuitry have been previously reset Continuation of the system after the homing mode is dependent upon the signal End 115 Homing-N, described below.

Next, it is assumed that the clamps have not been positioned correctly along the X axis during the auxiliary homing mode, and that a subauxiliary homing mode is neces 120 sary for the X axis In this condition, the Q bar output of flip flop f 199 A is hi, as discussed above in connection with Fig 21 e, the positive pulse at input 1 of NAND gate NA 85 B is inverted by the gate, and the 125 corresponding lo pulse output from the gate sets flip flop f J 60 B Also, the lo pulse signal X Axis Sub Aux Set Pulse-N is connected to input 10 of NAND gate NA 1 OOA resulting in a positive pulse at the CLK input of 130 flip flop f 99 A Accordingly, the positional the low speed of 425 cycles/second Wheti information from the X Homing Sensor the counter counts to four and its QD outSignal is established at the Q and Q bar put goes hi, the flip flop f#71 C is reset by outputs of the flip flop at this time, as pre a positive pulse from differentiator circuit viously described It is noted that the cir 560, and a lo pulse is developed from gate 70 cuitry for the X and Y parts of the sub NO 134 A for the signal X Stop-N, as preauxiliary homing mode is relatively inde viously described The signal X Stop-N rependent Thus, if the Y subauxiliary homing sets flip flop ff 2113, as previously described mode is not entered, positional information in connection with Fig 21 d, resulting in a is not established in the flip flop f 99 B hi condition for the signal X Run-N As 75 When the flip flop #ff 60 813 is set, a lo con described in connection with Fig 21 j, the dition is established at input 5 of NAND hi signal X Run-N sets the signal X Count gate NA 60 C and input 3 of AND gate Pulse-Po lo, thus terminating the X stepping A 100 C Although the single-shot S 559 B is motor Accordingly, the clamps have been still triggered by the positive pulse at its pin moved in the X coordinate direction four 8 10, the lo condition at input 3 of AND gate steps or pulses past the location at which A 100 C prevents the positive pulse generated the X Homing Sensor indicated a change by differentiator circuit 572 from passing of direction, and the clamps have now been through this gate It will be recalled that positioned at their correct home location in the single-shot S 559 B times out after a 6 the X subauxiliary homing mode, with 85 microsecond delay to permit sufficient time movement having taken place from the for the flip flop f 60 B (or flip flop #85 A) proper direction.

to be set and the gates NA 60 C and A 100 C Referring back to Fig 21 d, when the X to be conditioned Thus, the lo pulse signals run flip flop #f 211 B has been reset by the End Homing Pulse-N and Homing Clear-N signal X Stop-N, a lo condition is estab 90 are not received at this time lished at input 9 of NOR gate NO 20 C by When the flip flop #ff 60 B is set and its the flip flop The operation of the circuitry output 8 goes from lo to hi, the differentiator responsive to such a signal will be explained circuit 574 generates a positive pulse as after a description of the Y subauxiliary the signal X Run Set-P Referring to Fig homing mode 95 21 d, the positive pulse signal X Run Set-P The operation of the Y subauxiliary homis inverted by NOR gate NO 20 A and the ing mode is similar to that described in resulting lo pulse sets the X run flip flop connection with the X subauxiliary homing 021 B Thus, the flip flop output signal X mode Referring to Fig 21 e, if the Q bar Run-N is set lo and the signal X Run-P output of flip flop #f 99 B is hi, which was set 100 is set hi Referring to Fig 21 j, the lo signal at the beginning of the auxiliary homing X Run-N starts the pulse train X Count mode, which indicates that a subauxiliary Pulse-P, which is formed from the signal homing mode for the Y axis should be LS Csc-N, as previously described It should entered, the flip flop #f 85 A is set, as prebe noted that at this time, the signal LS viously described, by the lo pulse from the 105 Shift-N remains lo, and that the square wave output of NAND gate NA 85 C The lo pulse signal LS Osc-N, and thus the pulse train for the signal Y Axis Sub Aux Set Pulse-N X Count Pulse-P, is still at the low rate of is inverted by the NAND gate NA 100 B, 425 cycles/second As described in con and is utilized to clock Y position data into nection with Fig 21 k, the hi signal X Run-P the flip flop ff 99 813, as previously described 110 and the pulse train X Count Pulse-P result The output 8 of the set flip flop #f 85 A goes in formation of the lo pulse train X Combo lo thus resulting in a lo signal at both N for driving the X stepping motor As in input 4 of NAND gate NA 60 C and input 4 the auxiliary homing mode, the XA Pulse of AND gate A 100 C The lo condition at is inhibited since the signal LS Shift-N is input 4 of AND gate A 100 C prevents 115lo at this time passage of the positive pulse generated by Referring to Fig 21 e when the X Homing circuit 572, as previously described in conSensor senses a crossing along the X axis, nection with the X subauxiliary homing and a change of state is obtained at input 2 mode Accordingly, if either or both of the of exclusive OR gate E Ol O 11 A, the positive X and Y subauxiliary homing modes are 120 pulse is again generated by differentiator entered, the positive pulse from differencircuit 544 Since input 5 of NOR gate tiator circuit 572 is not passed through NO 71 B remains lo, the positive pulse is the AND gate A 100 C, and the homing inverted twice by inverter I 46 D and gate mode is not ended at this time.

N 071 B and the resulting hi pulse sets the When the output 11 of the set flip flop 125 flip flop f/71 C The resulting lo output 13 f J 85 A goes hi, the differentiator circuit 576 of the flip flop releases the hold on counter generates a positive pulse as the signal Y CT 58, and the counter begins its count to Run Set-P Referring to Fig 21 d, the posi-four, as actuated at the CLK input by the tive pulse Y Run Set-P is inverted by the signal Homing LS Osc-P, which is still at NOR gate NO 20 B, and the corresponding 130 1,570,244 1,570,244 lo pulse sets the Y run flip flop ff 32 B. Accordingly, the flip flop output Y Run-N is set lo, and, as described in connection with Fig 21 j, the lo signal Y Run-N results in formation of the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P from the signal LS Osc-N, which is at its low speed of 425 cycles/ second Referring to Fig 21 k, the hi signal Y Run-P and the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P result in formation of the lo pulse train Y Combo-N for moving the Y stepping motor As noted above, the signal LS Shift-N is lo at this time, and thus the YA Pulse is inhibited.

Referring back to Fig 21 e, when the Y Homing Sensor Signal indicates a change of direction, the signal at input 12 of exclusive OR gate E 0101 B changes state, the differentiator circuit 548 generates a positive pulse, and the resulting positive pulse formed at input 5 of flip flop f 186 C sets the flip flop, which releases the hold on counter CT 87 It is noted in this regard that the input 12 of NOR gate N 086 B is lo at this time When the counter CT 87 counts to four and its QD output goes hi, the flip flop #86 C is reset by the pulse generated by circuit 564, and a lo pulse is developed as the signal Y Stop-N at the output of NOR gate NO 134 B, as previously described.

As described in connection with Fig 21 d, the signal Y Stop-N then resets the Y run flip flop fi 32 B, resulting in a hi output signal Y Run-N The hi signal Y Run-N, as described in connection with Fig 21 j, causes the signal Y Count Pulse-P to go lo, and terminates movement of the Y stepping motor Thus, the clamps have been moved four pulses or steps past the position at which the Y Homing Sensor indicated a change of state, and the clamps have been positioned at the desired home location along the Y axis during the Y subauxiliary homing mode, and while the clamps have been moved from the correct direction.

It is noted at this time that the proper direction for movement of the X and Y stepping motors has been determined throughout the basic homing mode, the auxiliary homing mode, and the subauxiliary homing mode by the signals X Direction and Y Direction, as shown in Fig 21 e As previously discussed, the X Direction and Y Direction signals are determined by the signals X Home Dir-P and Y Home Dir-P, respectively, from the Q outputs of the flip flons f 199 A and f 199 B Accordingly, irrespective of the particular homing mode involved, the Q outputs of the flip flops are set in the 60: appropriate condition to obtain proper control of the X and Y stepping motors and movement of the clamps in the desired direction.

Referring back to Fig 21 d, when the Y Gnus Uip flop ff 32 B has been reset in the subauxiliary homing mode, the signal Y Run-P is reset lo Accordingly, the input 8 of NOR gate NO 20 C is lo when movement in the Y direction during the subauxiliary homing mode has been 70 completed Thus, if both the X and Y subauxiliary homing modes were entered, the output of NOR gate NO 20 C goes hi when both X and Y run flip flops ff 21 B and 032 B are reset by the signals X Stop-N and Y 75 Stop-N, respectively If only the X subauxiliary homing mode was entered, the Y run flip flop #32 B was not set by the signal Y Run Set-P, and the input 8 to NOR gate NO 20 C remains low during the X sub 80 auxiliary homing mode Accordingly, in this case, the output of NOR gate N 020 C goes hi when the X run flip flop ff 21 B is reset by the signal X Stop-N Similarly, if only the Y subauxiliary homing mode was 85 entered, the X run flip flop 1 J 21 B was not set by the signal X Run Set-P, and the input 9 of NOR gate NO 20 C remains lo throughout the Y subauxiliary homing mode Thus, when the Y run flip flop #32 B is reset by 90 the signal Y Stop-N, the output of gate NO 20 C goes hi at that time Accordingly, the output of gate NO 20 C is only set hi until completion of all subauxiliary homing modes entered, whether it be X, Y, or X 95 and Y At this time, the differentiator circuit 550 generates a positive pulse resulting in formation of the positive pulse as the signal Mode Pulse-P at the output of NOR gate NO 20 D Accordingly, the positive pulse 100 Mode Pulse-P will be generated irrespective of whether one or both of the subauxiliary homing modes had been entered.

Referring now to Fig 21 e, the signal Mode Pulse-P is connected to input 12 of 105 NAND gate NA 73 D and input 9 of NAND gate NA 45 B Since the input 13 of gate NA 73 D is lo, the single-shot S 533 B is inhibited, as described in connection with the auxiliary homing mode However, since 110 the output of inverter 146 C to input 10 of NAND gate NA 45 B is hi, the positive pulse Mode Pulse-P is passed through the gate NA 45 B and is inverted to trigger the singleshot S 533 A at pin 9 of the single-shot As 115 before, the single-shot S 533 A undergoes a millisecond delay, and when the singleshot times out the digierentiator circuit 566 generates a positive pulse Since either one or both of the flip flops ff 60 B or ff 85 A was 120 set during the start of the subauxiliary homing mode, either one or both of the inputs 4 or 5 at NAND gate NA 60 C is lo at this time Accordingly, the output of gate NA 60 C and the input 3 of NOR gate NO 9 B 125 is hi, and the lo pulse formed at input 2 of NOR gate NO 9 B is prevented from passing through the gate by the hi signal at input 3 of this gate However, since the input 10 of AND gate All A is also hi, as 130 341,570,244 determined by the output of gate NA 60 C, the positive pulse generated by circuit 566 is passed through the gate to input 6 of NOR gate NO 9 C The positive pulse is inverted and passed through gate NO 9 C, such that a lo pulse is formed as the signal End HomingN The lo pulse at the output of gate NO 9 C is also inverted by inverter h 1 OC, and the corresponding positive pulse from the inverter is inverted by the NOR gate NO 9 A as a lo pulse for the signal Homing Clear-N, which is utilized to reset the flip flops of the homing circuitry for a subsequent homing operation Accordingly, at this point the homing mode has been completed irrespective of whether one or more subauxiliary homing modes were entered.

Referring now to Fig 21 d, irrespective of the state of the signal Basic Home-P from flip flop f 221 A, the input 1 of NAND gate NA 1 l B is hi at this time, since the input 3 of OR gate 08 C goes hi when the pulse generated by differentiator circuit 550 decays Accordingly, the lo pulse End Homing-N is inverted and passed through the NAND gate N A 11 B as a positive pulse which triggers the single-shot S 522 B at its pin 10 The single-shot S 522 I undergoes a five millisecond delay, and when the singleshot times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 578 generates a positive pulse The NAND gate N A 11 C inverts the positive pulse, since the signal NTB Mode-OP is hi in the absence of a thread break indication from the Thread break Sensor, as discussed above The signal Clamp Mode-OP was set lo before the homing mode was entered, and, accordingly, the lo pulse formed at input 11 of NOR gate N 034 B is inverted by the gate and passed as a hi pulse to input 1 of NOR gate NO 135 A.

Since the signal Aux Start-P is normally lo, the positive pulse at input 1 of NOR gate N 0135 A is inverted by the gate and again by inverter 131 B, such that a positive pulse is formed at input 6 of the flip flop #J 34 A which sets the flip flop The output of this flip flop Mem Cycle Enable-P is set hi, while the output Mem Cycle Enable-N is set lo to initiate the first memory cycle under program control of the system.

Under program control, the needle may be reciprocated at either fast or slow speed.

At fast speed, the sewing machine is driven at a rate of approximately 3000 revolutions/ minute by the Quick device, such that the needle reciprocates at the same rate Accordingly, the basic timing cycle for the machine at the fast rate is 20 milliseconds/ cycle, and at this rate the needle enters the fabric once every 20 milliseconds At the slow speed, the machine is driven at approximately 200 revolutions/minute, such that the timing cycle at the slow speed is approximately 300 milliseconds, with the needle entering the fabric once every 300 milliseconds.

A schematic illustration for the timing cycle at the fast speed of 20 milliseconds is illustrated in Fig 25 At the time T 1 the 70 needle is in its down position in the fabric, and at time T 2 the memory cycle is initiated The time period represented by delta T 1 occurs during the memory cycle while information is read from the PROM and is 75 decoded The time required by the memory cycle (delta T 1) is approximately 3/10 of 1 millisecond and the memory cycle ends at time T 3 The time T 4 represents the time at which a positive pulse is formed as the 80 signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P in respone to the photosensor in the unit 62, which indicates that energization of the motors may be initiated When the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P is received, movement of 85 the stepping motors is initiated during the period of time delta T 2 Although the needle does not actually leave the fabric until a later time T 5, energization of the motors may be started at the time T 4 due 90 to a lag time associated with the motors and inertia in the work holder Accordingly, the clamps, which are driven by the stepping motors, do not actually start to move until the time T 6, which is after the time T 5 when 95 the needle leaves the fabric It is noted that the period of time delta T 2 may represent tie worst lag time at the slow speed of the machine to prevent movement of the clamps at the slow speed before the needle leaves 100 the fabric Alternatively, the slow speed commands may be programmed to result in little or no movement of the clamps, as desired.

The period of time designated as delta 105 T 3 represents the period of time which may be required to actually move the clamps during the maximum amount of movement permitted as programmed in memory The needle is in its up position at the time T 7 110 Accordingly, the maximum amount of movement of the clamps is limited at fast speed due to the constraints of the time period delta T 3, such that clamp movement is completed at approximately time T 8 before the 115 needle again enters the fabric at time T 9.

The time elapsed during time period delta T 4 is a 5 millisecond delay after movement of the clamps and before the next memory cycle is initiated at the time T 2 At this time, 120 one cycle of the machine has been completed during which the needle is reciprocated once, assuming that the system is in a stitch mode.

During each timing cycle, information is read from the PROM and is decoded, and 125 the clamp is moved as specified during the cycle The program in the PROM results in a sequence of such cycles during a sewing operation, such that the clamp is moved in a series of steps, as will be described below 130 1,570,244 During the memory cycle the control system reads information from the memory of the PROM, and utilizes the data in a decoded form to perform an operation by the sewing machine Referring now to Fig 26, each of the PRO Ms have 256 eight bit words, with each of the words being designated 1, 2, 3, 255, and 256 The separate bits in each word are designated bl, b 2, 17, and b 8, with the bit bi being the low order bit, and the bit b 8 being the high order bit As indicated, all of the eight bit words are separated into two banks, bank A and bank B, with the low order bits bl, b 2, b 3, and b 4 of each of the 256 words being located in bank A, while the high order bits b S, b 6, M, and b 8 are located in bank B Accordingly, the bank A comprises 256 four bit words of the low order bits, while the bank B comprises 256 four bit words of the high order bits The corresponding address for each of the eight bit words or storage locations is set forth at the left in the drawings Since 256 words are included in memory, the address for the first eight bit word is the binary configuration 00000000, while the binary configuration of the address for the 256th eight bit word is 11111111.

The memory cycle involved with each of the words is also specified in the drawing, and will be further described below.

Referring now to Fig 21 a, the machine operator may select various program modes by the four way Program Select switch, as previously described in connection with Fig.

18 For the selection A, an entire program is located in bank A of the PROM, and comprises a separate program in itself Similarly, if the operator selects the B setting of the switch, an entire program is utilized in bank B For the setting Remote A/B Select, the operator may switch banks to obtain separate programs in banks A and B by actuation of a switch in a foot pedal, as described For the Extend setting of the Program Select Switch, the control system first utilizes a portion of the program located in bank A, and then automatically switches to the remainder of the program located in bank B. Returning now to Fig 26, the memory layout in the PROM for the A, B, or Remote A/B Select settings of the Program Select Switch are illustrated in this drawing In this configuration, a complete program should be placed in one or more of the two banks Thus, if the bank A has been selected by the operator, a complete program should be contained in bank A, and the data necessary for this program must be sufficiently small to permit placement of the program in this bank Similarly, if bank B has bcen selected by the operator, a separate program must be contained in bank B, and should be sufficiently small to permit placement in this bank Of course, it is desirable to place two separate programs in the memory, if possible, to make maximum use of the PROM Thus, the operator can select the desired program by the setting of the 70 Program Select Switch for operation of the machine Also, for the Remote A/B Select setting of the Program Select Switch, a program should be located in each of the banks, and after completion of a program in one 75 bank, the operator may select a program in the other bank by depressing the foot pedal.

Thus, after completion of the program in one bank, the operator may depress the foot pedal, and the program in the other bank 80 may be started When the program in the second bank is completed, the operator may initiate the program in the first bank by again depressing the foot pedal, or may continue with the same program, as desired 85 Accordingly, a separate program may be placed in both of the banks, and either of the programs may or may not occupy the entire 256 four bit words of the bank During each memory cycle for one sequence of 90 the machine, three four bit words are utilized from each bank for the sequence Thus, assuming that a program is started in bank A, the control system initiates the program at word 2 and at address 00000001 during 95 the first memory cycle, with the first four bit word from bank A being skipped at storage location or address 00000000 The system first reads in and decodes the Y data from bank A which is located in the lower 100 bit portion of word 2 After decoding the Y data, the system reads in the four bits of X data located in word 3 of bank A, corresponding to the address 00000010 After decoding the X data, the control system 105 then reads the four bit control or command word from the four lower order bits in bank A of word 4, corresponding to the address 00000011, after which the system decodes this information for a single sequence of the 110 machine.

Thus, the complete information of twelve bits has been read from the PROM during the first memory cycle at this time, and further information is not read from the PROM 115 until the next memory cycle, which is approximately 20 milliseconds later during fast speed operation of the machine During the second memory cycle, the system reads the Y data from word 5 of bank A, the X data 120 from word 6 of bank A, and the control word 7 of bank A, as the address registers are incremented, with the information being decoded between readings Accordingly, during each subsequent memory cycle the 125 system continues to read three four bit words from bank A until the program has been completed Assuming that the program occupies all of the memory in bank A, the last memory cycle will be number 130 1,570,244 85, as shown, and during this memory cycle the system will read the Y data from word, 254 of Bank A, the X data word 255 of Bank A, and finally the control word from word 256 of Bank A, which corresponds to the address 11111111 At this point, the program must be completed since the program in question is entirely contained in bank A, and the control word in word 256 must therefore be an End of Program Command Of course, the program may be terminated at some memory cycle before the 85th memory cycle, if it is not necessary to utilize the entire memory of the bank.

The same operation takes place in reading a program from bank B During the first memory cycle the system sequentially reads the four bit data contained in words 2 to 4 of bank B, with the first word being skipped at address 00000000 Thus, the system reads the Y data from word 2 of bank B corresponding to address 00000001, the X data in word 3 of bank B corresponding to address 00000010, and the control word in word 4 of bank B corresponding to address 00000011 During the second memory cycle the three four bit words are read from words to 7 of bank B The reading sequence continues until the program has been completed, and if the program occupies the entire bank B, the final three four bit words are read from words 254 to 256.

The configuration of the PROM memory for the Extend setting of the Program Select Switch is illustrated in Fig 27 As noted above, this mode of the Select Switch will be utilized when the program is too large to be contained in one bank of the PROM During the first memory cycle, the control system obtains the first four bit word, containing Y data, from word 2 of bank A corresponding to the address 00000001 The system contines to read the next two four bit words in words 3 and 4 of bank D During the second memory cycle the program reads three four bit words from words 5 to 7 in bank A The system sequentially reads three four bit words during each memory cycle until the information from words 254 to 256 has been obtained from bank A during memory cycle No 85, at which point the reading of information from the PROM is automatically switched by the system to bank B During the 86th memory cycle, the program first reads the Y data contained in word 1 of bank B corresponding to the address 00000000 Thus, the address 00000000 is not skipped in bank B of the Extend mode As shown, the second and third four bit words during memory cycle 86 are obtained from words 2 and 3, respectively, of bank B The system continues reading information from bank B during each of the memory cycles until the program has completed If the program occupies the entire memory of bank B, in addition to bank A, the last memory cycle will be 170, and the last four bit word will be obtained from word 255 of bank B corresponding to the address 11111110 In the Extend mode, the 256th word correspond 70 ing to the address 11111111 is not used It is apparent that since the number 256 is not divisible by three, there will always be one four bit word in each bank which will not be used 75 As illustrated in Figs 28, the Y data word comprises four bits irrespective of the bank in which it is located, and is utilized as positional information for movement of the clamps As described, in bank A the 80 four bits are contained in the low order bits bl, b 2, b 3, and b 4, while in bank B the four Y data bits are contained in the high order bits b 5, b 6, b 7, and b 8 A typical word is shown in its binary configuration, and comn 85 prises the decimal number 3 For this information of the Y data word, the control system will direct the stepping motors to move the clamps three steps in the Y direction Similarly, in connection with Fig 29, 90 the X data word comprises four bits which is contained as the four low order bits in bank A, and as the four high order bits in bank B In this particular example, the X data information is equal to five steps in 95 the X direction as coded in binary form.

The format of the four bit control word for both the X and Y positional information is illustrated in Fig 30 If the control word is stored in bank A, it is positioned 100 in the low order bits bl, b 2, b 3, and b 4, while if in bank B, it is contained in the high order bits b 5, b 6, b 7, and b 8 Whether the word is located in bank A or bank B, the format is the same The low order bit of 105 the four bit word is a binary bit which designates the direction of movement desired in the Y direction As indicated, if the bit bl or b 5 is a binary 1, this specifies that the clamps should be moved relative the needle 110 in the +Y direction Accordingly, the clamps will be moved in the +Y the magnitude of movement as indicated in the corresponding Y data word If the binary bit bl or b 5 is zero, this indicates that the 115 clamps should be moved in the -Y direction the magnitude of movement contained in the Y data word The directional information for movement in the X direction is specified in the second low order bit b 2 or 120.

b 6 of the four bit control word If the bit is a binary 1, a movement in the +X direction is indicated, while the clamp is moved in the -X direction if the bit is a binary 0 Accordingly, the clamps are moved in the speci 125 fied direction as indicated by this bit, while the magnitude of direction is indicated in the X data word.

The two high order bits in the control word designate the particular sewing mode 130 1,570,244 to be undertaken corresponding to this memory cycle As indicated, if the Mode Code or Command bits have a binary configuration of 00, the Stop Stitch Mode will be entered In this mode, the reciprocation of the sewing needle is stopped, and the clamps are moved without stitching Although the fabric is not being stitched during this mode, the direction and magnitude of movement in the X and Y directions is specified by the X and Y direction bits and by the X and Y data words, as described above As indicated, if the Mode Code in the two high order bits has a binary configuration of 01, the Stitch Mode will be commanded to the machine In this configuration, the machine is operated at its fast speed If the two high order bits have a configuration of 10, the Slow Stitch Mode will be entered, and the sewing machine operates at its slow speed During the Stitch and Slow Stitch Modes, the X and Y directional information and X and Y data words are used as positional information for the clamps, as described This Slow Stitch mode is normally entered towards the end of a program or before the Stop Stitch Mode, and may be used to slow the machine immediately prior to stopping reciprocation of the needle Finally, if the Mode Code has a binary configuration of 1 11 the End of Program Mode is entered, instructing the sewing machine to stop reciprocation of the needle, and automatically resulting in a homing mode to position the clamps at the correct home position relative the needle.

The End of Program Command or Mode will only occur once in a program, and is the last command used in the program to end the sewing operation.

By programming a sequence of control words and their associated X and Y data words, a program for operation of the machine is obtained For example, the Mode Code in the first control word may be a Stop Stitch Command to move the clamps from their home location to a spaced position where sewing will commence, after which the Stitch Mode is entered to sew the fabric at fast speed Alternatively, the Mode Code in the first control word may be a Stitch Command, such that during the first timing cycle of the machine the fabric is stitched at fast speed in the direction as indicated by the X and Y Directions in the same control word, and with magnitudes as indicated in the corresponding X and Y data words It may be desirable to use a consecutive sequence of control words which command the Stitch Mode, such that the machine continuously stitches at its fast speed while moving in the respective directions and magnitudes as specified in the associated data At some point it may be desirable to move the clamps without stitching from a first stitched location to another spaced location where stitching again begins, for example, while moving different corners of the label into alignment with the needle to stitch corners of the label to the 70 fabric In this case the Slow Stitch Commands may be used to slow the machine.

Then the Stop Stitch Mode is entered by using the proper information in the Mode Code bits of the control word, at which time 75 the thread will be automatically cut, and the clamps will be moved according to the direction and magnitude information associated with the particular Stop Stitch Command Of course, a consecutive sequence of 80 Stop Switch Commands may be utilized to continuously move the clamps without stitching When the clamps have been positioned during the Stop Stitch Mode, as desired, the Stitch Mode may be entered again, 85 after which the machine is operated at its fast speed Finally, when it is desired to end the stitching pattern, the Slow Stitch Mode may be entered for a few commands to slow the machine to its slow speed before enter 90 ing the End of Program Mode When the End of Program Mode has been commanded, reciprocation of the needle is stopped, the thread is automatically cut, and the clamps are returned to their home position by the 95 control system At this time, the program and sewing operation have been completed.

It will be seen that the program and control system may command the machine to stitch a first pattern comprising a sequence 100 of commands and steps, to move the clamps without stitching to a second spaced location on the fabric, and then to sew a second pattern comprising a sequence of stitching steps after which the program may be ter 105 minated Or, if desired, a number of spaced stitch patterns may be sewn after moving the clamps without stitching between the sewing sequences to form a number of spaced stitch patterns 110 The control system operates during the first and subsequent memory cycles as follows When the flip flop 8 J 34 A, shown in Fig 21 d, is set, and the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P goes hi, the differentiator circuit 115 580, which is illustrated in Fig 21 i, generates a positive pulse The pulse is inverted twice by inverters I 24 E and 124 F, and the flip flops 83 A, ff 3 B, 84 A, ff 4 B, 015 A, ff 15 B, #27 A, and ff 27 B are reset by the 120 flops are thus initialized at the start of the positive pulse at their inputs These flip memory cycles for later decoding of X and Y positional information.

As shown in Fig 21 c, when the signal 125 Mem Cycle Enable-N goes lo, responsive to the setting of the memory cycle flip flop f#34 A of Fig 21 d, the pulse train at input 12 or NOR gate N 038 A is inverted and passed through the gate as the signal Clock 130 1,570,244 Pulse, as previously described, Thus, the first pulse after the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N goes lo is passed through the gate N 038 A Although the nature of the signal Clock Pulse has been previously described, the associated clock signals may be better understood in connection with the illustrations of the signals in Fig 31 As shown, the signal Clock Pulse comprises a pulse train of narrow pulses, with the leading edge of each of the pulses corresponding to the trailing edge of the output H S Clock from the High Speed Oscillator Accordingly, the pulse train Clock Pulse is formed at the clock rate of the High Speed Oscillator, corresponding to the rate of 8500 pulses/second.

As shown in Fig 21 j, the signal Clock Pulse is connected to pin 10 of single-shot S 548 B, and each of the pulses triggers this single-shot Since the pulses in the signal Clock Pulse are relatively narrow, the singleshot S 548 B is utilized to regenerate the pulse, resulting in a corresponding pulse train Address Clock-P of widened pulses at the Qoutput of the single shot, as shown in Figs.

21 j and 31 As shown in Fig 21}, the signal Address Clock-P is connected to CLK input of the strobe counter CT 65 The counter Cr 65 is a four bit counter, but only the two lower order bits are utilized by the system.

The counter is cleared to its zero state by the signal Reset-N during initialization of the control system at its CLR input The counter is triggered at the trailing edge of each of the pulses in the signal Address Clock-P, with the output 14 of the counter reflecting the low order bit, and with the output 13 reflecting the next higher order bit Accordingly, the trailing edge of the first pulse received from the signal Address Clock-P increments the two low order bits of the counter bv one count to the binary configuration of 01, such that output 14 of the counter goes hi, while the output 13 remains lo This particular output is utilized to decode the Y data, as will be seen below.

Since the strobe counter CT 65 had previously been cleared to zero by the signal Reset-N, the outputs 14 and 13 of the counter were initially lo, before the counter was incremented Accordingly, input 4 of NAND gate NA 51 A, input 1 of NAND gate NASIB, and inputs 10 and 11 of NAND gate NA 5 l C were lo, after initialization, and the outputs of the gates NA 51 A, NA 51 B, and NA 51 C were hi before the counter was incremented.

When the counter is incremented the first time, with the output 14 of the counter being hi and with the output 13 being lo, the hi Output 14 of the counter is inverted by inverter 150 E, such that inputs 3 and 4 of NAND gate NA 5 I A are both lo, and the output of the gate NA 51 A remains hi However, for NAND gate NA 51 B, the lo output 13 of the counter is inverted by inverter ISOF, such that input 2 of this gate is set hi.

Since output 14 of the counter is connected to input 1 of the gate, the input 1 of gate NA 55 B is also hi, and the gate has been con 70 ditioned for use at its input 13 Since the lo output 13 of the counter CT 65 is connected to input 11 of NAND gate NA 51 C, the output of gate NA 51 C remains hi As shown, the Q bar output of the single-shot S 563 A 75 is connected as an input to all three of the gates NA 51 A, NA 51 B, and NA 51 C As described below, the Q bar output of this singleshot is set lo until after the counter CT 65 has been incremented, such that the single 80 shot inhibits all three gates NA 51 A, NA 51 B, and NA 51 C with their outputs hi until the single-shot times out and its Q bar output goes hi.

As shown in Fig 21 j, the pulse train Clock 85 Pulse is connected to pin 10 of the singleshot S 563 A, and the single-shot is triggered by each of the pulses As shown in Fig 31, the Q bar output of the triggered single-shot S 563 A goes lo at the time of the leading 90 edge of the pulses in the signal Address Clock-P, but the delay associated with the single-shot is longer than the pulses in the pulse train Address Clock-P Thus, the single-shot times out after the trailing edge 95 of the pulses in the signal Address Clock-P, at which time the counter CT 65 is incremented The counter CT 65 thus conditions the gates NA 51 A, NA 51 B, and NA 51 C before the single-shot S 563 A, times out, and 100 its Q bar output returns to hi When the single-shot S 563 A times out, a hi condition is then established at input 5 of gate NA 51 A, input 13 of gate NA 51 B, and input 9 of gate NA 51 C 105 As previously discussed, when the counter CT 65 is incremented the first time, the outputs of gates NA 51 A and NA 51 C are held hi by the outputs of the counter However, when the single-shot S 563 A times out, all the 110 inputs to NAND gate NA 51 B are then hi, resulting in a change of the gate output from hi to lo Accordingly, the signal Y Strobe-N changes from a hi to lo state, and as shown in Fig 21 i, this signal is inverted by inverter 115 I 50 C, such that the output of the inverter goes from lo to hi at this time In response, the differentiator circuit 520 generates a positive pulse at the input of the inverter I 50 D.

The use of this pulse for decoding Y in 120 formation will be discussed in detail below.

Referring to Figs 21 j and 31, at the time of the next pulse in the pulse train Clock Pulse, the single-shot S 563 A is again triggered, the next regenerated pulse in the sig 125 nal Address Clock-P is formed, and the counter CT 65 is incremented again at the trailing edge of Address Clock-P pulse The counter thus undergoes a change in its two lower order bits to a binary configuration of 130 1,570,244 10, with its output 14 being lo, and with output 13 being hi Since input 1 of gate NA 51 B and input 10 of gate NA 51 C are both lo, the outputs of these two gates are held hi by output 14 of the counter CT 65 at this time However, the output 14 of counter C 765 is inverted by inverter I 50 E, such that a hi condition is established at input 3 of NAND gate NA 51 A Also, since output 13 of counter CT 65 is hi, the input 4 of gate NA 51 A is also hi When the singleshot S 563 A again times out and its Q bar output goes hi, a hi condition is established at input 5 of gate NA 51 A Accordingly, the output X Strobe-N of gate NA 51 A goes from hi to lo at this time, and, as shown in Fig 21 i, the signal X Strobe-N is inverted by inverter I 50 A, such that the inverter output goes from lo to hi when the single-shot S 563 A times out In response, the differentiator circuit 518 generates a positive pulse which is presented at the input of inverter ISOB The use of this pulse to decode the X data information will be described in detail below.

Referring to Fig 21 j and 31, at the time of the third pulse in the pulse train Clock Pulse, the single-shot S 563 A is triggered, the Address Clock-P pulse is formed, and the counter CT 65 is again incremented at the trailing edge of the Address Clock-P pulse.

The incremented counter CT 65 assumes a binary configuration of 11, with both outputs 14 and 13 being set hi Since the output 14 of counter CT 65 is inverted by inverter ISOE, input 3 of gate NA 51 A is lo, and this gate is inhibited Similarly, since the hi output 13 of counter CT 65 is inverted by inverter ISOF, input 2 of NAND gate NA 51 B is lo, and this gate is also inhibited with its output hi However, the hi counter outputs 14 and 13 are connected to inputs 10 and 11 of NAND gate NA 51 C, thus conditioning this gate When the single-shot S 563 A times out, all three inputs to the gate NA 51 C are hi, resulting in a change of condition at the output of the gate from hi to lo, and the lo signal triggers the single-shot S 563 B at its pin 1.

As shown, the Q bar output of single-shot S 563 B is inverted by inverter 152 A, and when the single-shot is triggered the signal EMC-P is set hi, resulting in completion of the memory cycle, as will be seen below The signal EMC-P is inverted by inverter 152 B, and the lo inverter output is presented at the CLR input of counter CT 65 to clear the counter to zero for use of the counter during a subsequent memory cycle As shown in Fig 21 d, the hi signal EMC-P resets the memory cycle flip flop U 34 A, with its output Mem Cycle Enable-P being reset lo, and with its output Mem Cycle Enable-N being reset hi The signal EMC-P is also used elsewhere in the circuitry, as will be discussed below Referring to Fig 21 j, the signal EMC-P returns to its normal lo condition when the single-shot times out shortly after being triggered.

Thus, there has been described above the 70 manner in which three consecutive pulses of the Clock Pulse signal have been used to sequence the circuitry through a memory cycle It is noted in this regard that since the pulses in the pulse train Clock Pulse 75 occur at the trailing edge of the pulses in the signal H S Clock from the High Speed Oscillator, the signals Y Strobe-N, X StrobeN, and EMC-P are formed responsive to the trailing pulse edges of the H S Clock 80 signal.

The manner in which information is obtained from the memory of the commercially available PRO Ms is described in connection with Fig 21 a The internal gating of the 85 PRO Ms is such that the eight bits of a given memory word are presented as the output signal DO, D 1,, D 6, and D 7 of the PROM when an address for the word is presented at the inputs AO, A 1 ' A 6, and A 7 90 of the PROM The address has eight bits since there are 256 eight bit words in the PROM, and the eight bit address may form 256 unique binary configurations to address each eight bit word in the PROM When a 95 storage location is addressed in the PROM, the low order four bits of the addressed word in bank A are presented as the output signals DO, D 1, D 2, and D 3, while the high order four bits of the word in bank B are 100 presented as the outputs D 4, D 5, D 6, and D 7 Thus, the output DO represents the lowest order bit of the word, while the output D 7 represents the highest order bit.

As previously discussed, the hi pulse for 105 the signal Address, Clear-P which was formed before entering the homing mode, was utilized to clear both address registers AR 1 and AR 2 to zero The two registers AR 1 and AR 2 are four bit counters which 110 are cascaded to obtain the necessary eight bit address, with the register AR 1 containing the four low order bits of the address, and the register AR 2 containing the four high order bits of the address 115 It will be recalled that each of the pulses in the pulse train Address Clock-P were formed at the time of each of the pulses of the pulse train Clock Pulse as illustrated in Fig 31 Referring again to Fig 21 h, the 120 signal Address Clock-P is connected to the CLK input of the address register AR 1 containing the four low order bits of the address, and the address register AR 1 is incremented at the leading edge of each of the pulses in 125 the pulse train Address Clock-P When the address register AR 1 has been counted a sufficient number of times to be full, it assumes a binary configuration of 1111, and a hi carry output signal-is issued by the regi 130 401,570,244 ster to pins 7 and 10 of the address register AR 2 The hi carry output signal enables the register AR 2, and the register AR 2 will be incremented by the next pulse received at its CLK input from the signal Address Clock-P.

The same pulse also increments the low order register A Rl, and it returns to its zero condition, with a binary configuration of 0000 At this time the carry out signal from register AR 1 goes lo, and remains in its lo condition until the register AR 1 is again full In this manner, the high order register is incremented once every sixteen counts of the low order register A Rl, and the signal Address Clock-P increments the registers through their range of 256 binary configurations The outputs of the registers ARI and AR 2 are utilized as signals for the current address at the inputs AO, Al, A 6, and A 7 of the PROM Thus, as the address registers are counted, signals for the eight bit word in the PROM corresponding to the address will be formed at the outputs of the PROM.

Accordingly, during the first memory cycle of the program, when the first pulse from the signal Address Clock-P is received at the CLK input of the addres register AR 1, the address register is incremented by one count such that its low order bit is 1, while the three high order bits remanin zero Also, since the address register AR 2 had been previously cleared to zero and is not incremented by the first pulse, all four bits in the address register AR 2 remain zero at this time Accordingly, the address 00000001 is formed by the registers at the inputs of the PROM, with the binary 1 being formed at input AO of the PROM, and the registers thus signal the PROM to present the eight bit word corresponding to this address at the outputs of the PROM It may be seen that during the first memory cycle, the address 00000000 is not used When the address register A Rl is again incremented by the signal Address Clock-P, the address 00000010 is formed at the outputs of the registers, and the PROM selects the corresponding eight bit word in memory, and forms the word at its outputs When the register A Ri is incremented the third and final time during the first memory cycle, the PROM again forms its output signals as based upon the output signals of the registers Thus, during each memory cycle the address registers are incremented three times, resulting in three separate outputs from the PROM In this manner, the address register are sequentially incremented to obtain the information in memory at the outputs of the PROM, with three output words being formed during each memory cycle.

Four selected bits in each eight bit word at the output of the PROM are formed into inverted information as the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D DataN, as described below Assuming first that the Program Select Switch has been set at the terminal A, the information is obtained from bank A of the PROM corresponding 70 to the low order bits at the PROM outputs DO, D 1, D 2, and D 3 Since the terminal A is open, a hi condition is established by the power source at the input of the inverter 1131 C through the resistor R 135 The hi 75 signal is inverted twice by inverters 1131 C and 1131 D, and a hi signal is formed at input 2 of AND gate A 136 A, input 6 of AND gate A 136 C, input 2 of AND gate A 137 A, and input 6 of AND gate A 137 C The hi 80 signal conditions these gates for passage of data from the four low order bits of the PROM to the NOR gates NO 138 A, NO 138 B, NO 138 C, and NO 138 D, as will be seen below 85 The lo output from inverter 1131 C is connected to input 4 of AND gate A 136 R, input 8 of AND gate A 136 D, input 4 of AND gate A 137 B, and input 8 of AND gate A 137 D Accordingly, input 2 of NOR gate 90 NO 138 A, input 4 for NOR gate NO 138 B, input 6 of NOR gate NO 138 C, and input 8 of NOR gate N 0138 D are lo at this time.

It will be seen that output DO of the PROM is connected to input 1 of AND 95 gate A 136 A Since input 2 of AND gate A 136 A is hi, if the output DO is hi, input 1 of NOR gate N 0138 A is also hi, and the NOR gate N 0138 A inverts the hi signal to a lo condition as the signal A Data-N due 100 to the lo signal at input 2 of NOR gate NO 138 A Contrawise, if the PROM output DO is lo, input 1 of NOR gate N 0138 A is alsol lo, and the NOR gate inverts the signal to a hi condition as the signal A Data-N 105 Thus, the output DO from the PROM is inverted as the signal A Data-N The output D 1 of the PROM is connected to input 5 of the AND gate A 136 C, and it will be apparent that the binary state of the output 110 D 1 will be inverted by the NOR gate N 0138 B as the signal B Data-N Similarly, the output D 2 of the PROM is connected to input 1 of AND gate A 137 A, and results in an inverted signal C Data-N Finally, the 115 PROM output D 3 is connected through AND gate A 137 C to the NOR gate NO 138 D, and this output of the PROM is inverted as the signal D Data-N.

The four PROM high order outputs D 4, 120 D 5, D 6, and D 7 of bank B are connected respectively to the AND gates A 136 B, A 136 D, A 137 B and A 137 D Since the other inputs to these gates are lo, the condition of the bank B PROM outputs will have no 125 effect upon the formation of the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D DataN at the current setting of the Program Select Switch Thus, when the Program Select Switch is set to bank A, the four low 130 1,570,244 order bits, presented at the output of the PROM, are inverted and are formed into the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D Data-N As the address registers are counted and the corresponding eight bit words in memory are sequentially presented at the outputs of the PROM, only the four low order bits are utilized in forming the Data-N signals.

If the Program Select Switch is moved to the B terminal to select bank B, the terminal B and contact of the switch are connected to ground, resulting in a lo input to the inverter 1131 C The lo signal is inverted twice by the inverters I 131 C and I 131 D, resulting in a lo condition at one of the inputs of the following AND gates: A 136 A, A 136 C, A 137 A, and A 137 C Hence input 1 of NOR gate NO 138 A, input 3 of NOR gate NO 138 B, input 5 of NOR gate NO 138 C, and input 7 of NOR gate N 0138 D are lo, and the four low order PROM output bits DO, D 1, D 2, and D 3, which are connected to the other inputs of the AND gates in question, will have no effect on the formation of the Data-N signals.

However, since the output of inverter 1131 C is now hi, input 4 of AND gate A 136 B, input 8 of AND gate A 136 D, input 4 of AND gate A 137 B, and input 8 of AND gate A 137 D are all hi at this time Since the four high order PROM output signals D 4, D 5, D 6, and D 7 are connected to the other inputs of these AND gates, the NOR gates NO 138 A, NO 138 B, NO 138 C, and N 0138 D invert the PROM outputs as the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D DataN The inverted output D 4 of the PROM corresponds to the signal A Data-N, the inverted output D 5 of the PROM corresponds to the signal B Data-N, the inverted output D 6 of the PROM corresponds to the signal C Data-N, and the inverted PROM output D 7 corresponds to the signal D Data-N Accordingly, when the Program Select Switch is selected to read from bank B of the PROM, the four high order PROM outputs are inverted and are formed as the Data-N signals As the address registers AR 1 and AR 2 sequence the PROM through the eight bit words in memory, a corresponding sequence of Data-N signals are formed from the high order bits of the PROM Thus, whether the Data-N signals are formed from the low or high order four bits of the PROM depends on the setting of the Program Select Switch for reading from bank A or Bank B of the PROM.

As d fflri-bq il r-unection with Fig 18, the LA Es 467 and 469 are provided on the of the cabinet to indicate the of the PROM from which the ins information If the contact of the Program Select Switch (Fig 21 a) has been set at its terminal A to read data from 65 PROM bank A, the input to inverter I 130 D is hi, the inverter output is l, and the lamp 467 is lit by the power source Vcc which is connected through a resistor R 135 B to the 70 lamp, thus indicating that the system is reading from Bank A of the PROM At the same time, the output of inverter 1130 C is hi, and lamp 469 is not lit If the Program Select Switch has been set at the B terminal, 75 the output of inverter I 131 C is hi, and the output of inverter 1130 C is thus lo The lamp 469 is lit by the power source Vcc which is connected to the lamp through resistor R 135 C The lamp 467 will not be lit 80 at this time since the output of inverter 1130 D is hi.

As previously discussed, the Program Select Switch may be set to the Extend mode, such that the control system first reads data 85 from bank A of the PROM, and automatically switches to bank B to obtain the remainder of the program It will be recalled that the signal Address Clear-P was used to reset the flip flop f 1130 A before the system 90 entered the homing mode, such that output 1 of the flip flop and the Extend terminal of the Program Select Switch are reset to a hi condition Accordingly, if the contact of the Program Select Switch is set to the Ex 95 tend terminal, the input of the inverter 1131 C is hi, and the four low order outputs of the PROM bank A are decoded as the Data-N signals, as previously described in connection with the terminal setting of the Program 100 Select Switch at terminal A However, as the address registers are incremented through their various states and fiinally become full, with both registers AR 1 and AR 2 containing a binary configuration of all i's, and 105 with the last word from bank A being formed at the outputs of the PROM, the carry output 15 of register AR 2 goes hi.

The inverter 1130 B inverts the carry output signal from register AR 2, and forms a lo 110 signal at its output When the next pulse from the signal Address Clock-P is received and both registers change to a binary configuration of all zeros, the carry output 15 of register AR 2 goes lo, and the correspond 115 ing output of inverter I 130 B goes hi Accordingly, the differentiator circuit 582 generates a positive pulse which sets flip flop f 130 A with its output 1 and the Extend terminal in a lo condition, thus switching 120 the PROM output bits which are used to form the Data-N signals to the four high order bits in bank B Accordingly, at this time the Data-N signals correspond to the inverted information obtained from address 125 00000000 in bank B of the PROM As the address registers are subsequently incremented, the later information will also be obtained from bank B of the PROM It will :ro 41 h 1,570,244 be apparent that the lamps 467 and 469 will provide an indication of the current PROM bank being used during the Extend program mode.

It was previously noted that the operator may set the Program Select Switch to the Remote A/B Select terminal in order to select the program bank being used through use of a third foot pedal Each time the third foot pedal is depressed, the Remote Program Select Switch is actuated, and alternately connects its normally closed (N C) and normally open (N O) terminals to ground When the N O terminal is disconnected from ground, the output 5 of optoisolator OP 139 will be hi Accordingly, the input of inverter 1131 C, which is connected through the contact of the Program Select Switch to the output of the optoisolator OP 139, is thus hi at this time, and the low order outputs from bank A of the PROM are used to form the Data-N signals After completion of the program in bank A, the operator may depress the pedal to actuate the Remote Program Select Switch, and connect the N O contact to ground In this case, the output 5 of optoisolator OP 139 will be lo, resulting in a lo input to inverter 1131 C, and a selection of information from bank B of the PROM After completion of the program in bank B, the operator may again depress the pedal to select the separate program in bank A Alternatively, the operator may use a program from the same bank a number of times without switching to the other bank, if desired Again, the lamps 467 and 469 indicate the program bank currently being used, and prevent possible confusion about the bank when the foot pedal is used.

It will be recalled in connection with Figs.

21 j and 31 that the first pulse from the pulse train Clock Pulse during the memory cycle results in formation of the signal Y Strobe-N However, this signal is not formed until the single-shot S 563 A times out, and is sometime after the signal Address ClockP increments the address registers AR 1 and AR 2 of Fig 21 a Accordingly, the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D Data-N are formed from the Y data word for the new setting of the address registers before the lo signal Y Strobe-N is received.

Similarly, when the second pulse in the signal Clock Pulse is received for use in connection with the X data, the address registers have already been incremented by the signal Address Clock-P to form the Data-N signals from the X data word before the lo signal X Strobe-N is received Finally, when the third pulse in the signal Clock Pulse is received, the address registers have already been incremented before the single-shot S 563 B of Fig 23 j is triggered and the hi signal EMC-P is formed Accordingly, the control word is formed as the Data-N signals before the hi signal EMC-P is received.

As shown in Fig 21 A, the signals A DataN, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D data-N are connected to both X and Y preset counters 70 CT 61 and CT 62 The counters CT 61 and CT 62 are utilized as four bit up counters, and are cleared during initialization by the signal Reset-N Both counters operate in a manner such that the information in the 75 Data-N signals is loaded into the counters if a lo condition is present at pin 9 of the counters, and at the time of a rising edge at pin 2 of the counters.

As previously discussed, in response to 80 the first pulse in the signal Clock Pulse, the signal Y Strobe-N goes lo after the Y data word in the PROM has been formed as the Data-N signals Accordingly, the signal at pin 9 of the Y counter CT 62 is lo at this 85 time Thus, the Data-N signals will be filled into the Y counter CT 62 when a rising edge is obtained at pin 2 of the counter The signal Y Strobe-N is also connected to the input of inverter 167 C When the signal Y 90 Strobe-N goes lo, the output of inverter 167 C goes hi, and differentiator circuit 584 generates a positive pulse at input 5 of NOR gate NO 104 C The pulse is inverted twice by NOR gate NO 104 C and inverter I 67 E 95 forming a positive pulse of narrow width at input 9 of NOR gate NO 104 D The gate NO 104 D inverts the pulse again to a lo pulse of narrow width which is presented at pin 2 of counter CT 62 On the rising edge 100 of the lo pulse at pin 2, the signals A DataN, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D Data-N are strobed into the counter CT 62 for later use.

It will be recalled that the signal A Data-N is the low order bit and D Data-N is the 105 high order bit, and that the Data-N signals are in inverted form Accordingly, the counter CT 62 will be utilized to increment the inverted data toward a binary configuration of all 1 's 110 A will be seen below, the data contained in the Y counter indicates the number of steps the Y stepping motor should be driven, and the Y counter is used to count these steps The pulse train Y Combo-N is 115 formed for driving the Y stepping motor, and will contain the proper number of pulses the stepping motor should be moved.

However, this pulse train may be modified to obtain better control over the stepping 120 motor, and the manner in which the pulse train is changed depends upon the number of pulses or steps the motor will be driven.

If four or more pulses will be used in the signal Y Combo-N during a given timing 125 cycle of the machine, an early pulse will be removed from the pulse train, and will be automatically added to the end of the pulse train without use of the Y counter Accordingly, in this case the data in the counter 130 1,570,244 should be modified to reflect the missing or removed pulse, and since the counter data is in inverted form, the counter will be incremented by one count to obtain correspondence between the counter and the counted part of the pulse train Y Combo-N.

So long as the signal at pin 9 of Y counter CT 62 remains lo, information may' be filled into the counter by the Data-N signals, as previously described, but the counter may not be incremented at this time However, once the signal at pin 9 of the counter goes hi, the counter may be incremented one count by the rising edge of a signal at pin 2 of the counter The hi conditions does not occur at the counter pin 9 until the signal Y Strobe-N goes hi, which takes place when the single-shot S 563 A is triggered the second time during the memory cycle At this time, the Q bar output of the single-shot goes la, and the signal Y Storage-N returns hi.

As will be seen below, the Y data word is decoded to form the modified pulse train to the Y stepping motor If the decoded data indicates that four or more pulses should be issued to the Y stepping motor, the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N is set lo If less than four pulses will be formed in the pulse train to the motor, the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N remains hi, in which case the NOR gate NO 104 B of Fig 21 j is inhibited with a lo signal at its output, and the counter CT 62 will not be incremented However, if the Y stepping motor will be stepped four or more pulses, and the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N is set lo, the Y counter CT 62 will be incremented by one count$ as described below.

Referring to Figs 21 j and 32, the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N is set lo at approximately the same time T 1 that the signal Y Strobe-N goes lo The lo signal Y Strobe-N is connected to the input of inverter I 67 D where it is inverted to a positive signal at its output, which remains hi until the signal Y Strobe-N returns hi at time T 3 The inverted signal from the output of inverter I 67 D is delayed by delay circuit 586, and the delayed signal is formed at the input 2 of NOR gate NO 104 B (shown in Fig 32 as NO 104 B( 2)).

As shown, the delayed signal goes hi at time T 2 and returns lo at time T 4 Betweenthe times Ti and T 2 both inputs to the NOR gate NO 104 B are lo, and the output of this gate goes hi until time T 2 when it again returns lo, since the delayed signal at input 2 of gate NO 104 B then goes hi The delayed signal at input 2 of NOR gate NO 104 B again goes lo at time T 4, resulting in two lo signals at the inputs of the gate Accordingly, the output of gate NO 104 B again goes hi at time T 4 Thus the differentiator circuit 588 generates a positive pulse at both times T 1 ad 17 when the output of gate NO 104 B 656 iehi The positive pulses are inverted by NOR gate NO 104 C, inverter I 67 E, and NOR gate NO 104 D, and narrow lo pulses are formed at pin 2 of Y counter CT 62 at times T 1 and T 4 When the lo pulse at pin 2 of the counter is formed at time T 1 the signal 70 Y Strobe-N is still lo, and, as previously noted, the lo signal at pin 9 of the counter CT 62 only effects loading of information into the counter However, when the second lo pulse appears at pin 2 of the counter 75 CT 62 at time T 4, the signal Y Strobe-N has already returned to its hi condition at pin 9 of the counter The second lo pulse thus increments the previously loaded data in the Y counter by one count responsive to 80 the rising edge of the pulse at pin 2 of the counter.

The operation of the X counter CT 61 in loading the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N and D Data-N into the counter in 85 response to the signal X Strobe-N is very similar to that described in connection with loading of information from the Data-N signals into the Y counter CT 62 Also, the loaded information is incremented by one 90 count in response to a lo condition for the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N in a manner similar to that described in connection with the Y counter CT 62.

When the signal X Strobe-N goes lo, the 95 X data word has already been formed as the Data-N signals The signal X Strobe-N is inverted by inverter 152 E, and when the output of this inverter goes hi the differentiator circuit 590 generates a positive pulse 100 which results in formation of a narrow lo pulse at the output of NOR gate NO 80 C.

Since the input to pin 9 of X counter Cr 61 is lo, the positive going edge of the lo pulse results in the information from the Data-N 105 signals being loaded into this counter Again, this information is in an inverted form with the low order bit corresponding to the signal A Data-N If the decoded X data indicates that the X stepping motor will be moved 110 less than four pulses, the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N remains hi throughout the memory cycle inhibiting gate NO 80 B, and the X counter CT 61 will not be incremented However, if the X stepping motor will be driven 115 four or more pulses, the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N goes lo Accordingly, the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N and the delayed signal formed by the delay circuit 592 at input 2 of NOR gate NO 80 B result in formation of 120 two narrow lo pulses at the output of NOR gate NO 80 C and at pin 2 of the X counter Cr 61 Since the first lo pulse occurs while the signal X Strobe-N is lo, the counter is not incremented at this time However, the 125 second lo pulse occurs after the signal X Strobe-N goes hi, i e, when the singleshot S 563 A is triggered again by the third pulse in the signal Clock Pulse, and the information which was loaded 130 1,570,244 into the counter CT 61 is incremented by one count, as described in connection with the Y counter CT 62 Accordingly, the data in the X counter has been modified to reflect the change in the pulse train to the X stepping motor.

* When the hi signal EMC-P is received, in response to the third pulse during the memory cycle in the pulse train Clock Pulse, the control word has already been formed as the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C DataN and D Data-N As shown in Fig 21 j, the Data-N signals are connected to the register R 47, which may comprise four D-type flip flops The signal EMC-P is connected to the register R 47, and when this signal goes hi, the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C DataN, and D-Data-N are decoded by the register at its outputs in a manner described below.

In review, when the first pulse in the signal Clock Pulse has been received and the signal Y Strobe-N later goes lo, the information from the four bit Y data word is loaded into the Y counter CT 62 When the next pulse in the pulse train Clock Pulse is received and the signal X Strobe-N later goes lo the information from the X data word is loaded into the X counter CT 61 In both cases, the information which is loaded into the Y and X counters may be incremented by one count in the event that either or both of the signals X Decode 4 Plus-N or Y Decode 4 Plus-N went lo Finally, after receipt of the third pulse in the pulse train Clock Pulse during the memory cycle, the information from the control word is decoded by the register R 47 for use in setting the directions of the X and Y stepping motors and for indicating the particular mode or command involved.

The signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C DataN, and D Data-N are also decoded for use in controlling the pulse train which is issued to the X and Y stepping motors Although the particular nature of the pulse train depends upon the number of pulses involved, generally, it is desirable to start and stop both the X and Y stepping motors at a gradual rate to prevent undue oscillation of the motors Both the X and Y information from the X and Y data words is decoded for use in performing this ramping function as follows.

Since the X and Y data words each contain four bits, there are 16 possible binary configurations for each of the data words, as shown in Fig 33 If it is desired to output one pulse to the X stepping motor, the X data word as coded in the PROM will have the binary configuration 0001, as shown.

Similarly, if it is desired to output 15 pulses to the Y stepping motor, the Y data word will have a binary configuration of 1111.

The corresponding inverted word for the X data or Y data words, which is formed as the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D Data-N, is also set forth in the drawing As indicated, the Data-N signals for the above examples of one pulse and 15 pulses 70 would have an inverted binary representation of 1110 and 0000, respectively, and are in l's complement form The Data-N signals of the inverted word are decoded to form signals which are utilized in-forming 75 the pulse train to the stepping' motors, as described below.

As shown in Fig 21 i, the current state of the signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D Data-N are reflected at the inputs 80 of the AND gate A 49 B, NOR gate N 039 B, NAND gates NA 66 B and NA 66 C and the inverters I 64 B and 164 C It may be seen from Fig 33, if four or more pulses are contained in the X data or Y data words, 'either 85 one or both of the corresponding signals C Data-N and D Data-N will be lo or zero.

Conversely, if the number of pulses coded in the data words is less than four, the signals C Data-N and D Data-N will both be 90 hi or one.

If the Y data word is coded for driving the Y stepping motor four or more'pulses% the corresponding Data-N signals are decoded as follows Since one or both of the 95 signals C Data-N or D Data-N is lo', the output of AND gate A 49 B will also be lo Accordingly, input 9 of NOR gate N 014 A and input 5 of NOR gate NO 14 D are lo Since the output of AND gate A 49 B is also con 100 nected to input 4 of AND gate A 49 C, the input 9 of NOR gate N 039 C is also lo The lo output of gate A 49 B is also formed at input 5 of NAND gate NA 66 B and input 11 of NAND gate NA 66 C, and accordingly, the 105 output of both NAND gates will be hi It will be seen that the input 11 of NOR gate N 026 C and input 9 of NOR gate N 026 D are hi, since they are connected to the output of gate NA 66 C Since both inputs of 110 NAND gate NA 49 A are hi, its output will b 3 lo Thus, the NOR gate N 039 C has two lo inputs; resulting in a hi condition at input 11 of NOR gate NO 14 B and input 5 of NOR gate N 026 A The lo output from 115 NAND gate NA 49 A is inverted by inverter I 64 A, such that input 2 of NOR gate NO 14 C and input 3 of NOR gate N 026 B are both hi Accordingly, among the NOR gates on chips 594 and 596, only gates NO 14 A and 120 NO 14 D have lo inputs from the signals described.

As previously discussed, after formation of the Data-N signals for the Y data word, the Y Strobe-N signal goes lo, resulting in 125 generation of a pulse by differentiator circuit 520 The positive pulse is inverted by inverter I 50 D, resulting in a lo pulse at input 12 of gate NO 14 B, input 6 of gate N 014 D, input 2 of gate N 026 B, and input 8 of gate 130 1,570,244 N 026 D It should be noted that the other inputs to these gates have been formed before the signal Y Strobe-N goes lo, and before the pulse is generated by circuit 520.

Since input 11 of gate NO 14 B, input 3 of gate N 026 B, and input 9 of gate N 026 D are all hi, the outputs of these gates will remain lo in spite of the lo pulse received at the other input of these gates However, since input 5 of NOR gate NO 14 D is lo, when the lo pulse is received at input 6 of this gate, a positive pulse is formed at its output which sets flip flop t J 4 B, thus setting the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N lo As previously discussed in connection with Fig.

21 j, this condition for the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N causes the Y counter to be incremented by one count when the signal Y Strobe-N returns hi.

Accordingly, when the Y Strobe-N signal is received during the first portion of the memory cycle in response to the first clock pulse received, the signal Y Decode 4 PlusN is set lo The remaining outputs of the flip flops on chips 598, 600, 602, 604 are hi at this time, since they were reset by the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P at the start of the memory cycle, and since the only gate on chips 594 and 596 which had been conditioned lo at one input and had been strobed with a lo pulse at its other input was gate NA 14 D.

The X data word is formed as the Data-N signals during the second phase of the memory cycle, and after formation of the pulse by differentiator circuit 520 If the X data word has been programmed to drive the X stepping motor four or more pulses, the corresponding Data-N signals are decoded as follows After the Data-N signals have been formed, they are decoded as signals for the gates on chip 594 and 596 in the same manner discussed above Thus, input 9 of gate NO 14 A, and input 5 of gate NO 14 D are conditioned lo, while input 11 of gate NO 14 B, input 2 of gate NO 14 C, input of gate N 026 A, input 3 of gate N 026 B, input 11 of gate N 026 C, and input 9 of gate NO 26 D are conditioned lo When the signal X Strobe-N goes lo, the diflerentiator circuit 518 generates a positive pulse which is inverted by inverter I 50 B Accordingly, a lo pulse is presented at input 8 of gate NO 14 A, input 3 of gate NO 14 C, input 6 of gate N 026 A, and input 12 of gate N 026 C Since input 9 of gate NO 14 A is lo, a positive pulse is formed at the output of this gate which sets flip flop fi 3 A, with its output signal X Decode 4 Plus-N set lo The outputs of the remaining gates on chips 594 and 596 remain lo at this time, and the other flip flops on chips 598, 600, 602, and 604 are not set in response to the signal X Strobe-N under the case at hand, i e, four or more counts in the X data word As previously discussed in connection with Fig 21 j, this lo signal X Decode 4 Plus-N results in the X counter CT 61 being incremented by one count.

In review, the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N is set lo in response to four or more pulses 70 programmed into the Y data word, and, sinilarly, the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N goes lo if four or more pulses are decoded in the X data word It should be noted that for convenience the condition of four or more 75 pulses for both data words are being discussed together However, either of the data words% or both, may contain less than four counts, and the setting of the signals Y Decode 4 Plus-N and X Decode 4 Plus-N are 80 independent of each other and are dependent on the respective data word.

As previously discussed in connection with Fig 33, if the X or Y data words are coded with less than four counts or pulses, 85 the C Data-N and D Data-N signals formed in response to the X and Y data words are both 1 or hi As shown in Fig, 21 i, since both the signals C Data-N and D Data-N are hi, the output of AND gate A 49 B will 90 also be hi, and input 9 of NOR gate NO 14 A and input 5 of NOR gate NO 14 D will both be hi Accordingly, the outputs of gates NO 14 A and NO 14 D will remain lo when the lo signals Y Strobe-N and X Strobe-N are 95 received, the flip-flops ff 3 A and #44 B will not be seth and the signals Y Decode 4 PlusN and X Decode 4 Plus-N will remain hi.

Thus, if the Y data word is less than four, the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N will not be set 100 lo Similarly, if the X data word contains less than four counts, the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N will not be set lo Accordingly, the signals Y Decode 4 Plus-N and X Decode 4 Plus-N are set lo if, and only if, the cor 105 responding Y and X data words are greater than or equal to four counts At this point, the possible states for the signals C Data-N and D Data-N have already been discusseds and it has been shown that both signals will 110 be in a hi condition during the following discussion, pertaining to less than four counts in the data words Also, in this case, input 4 of AND gate A 49 C, input 5 of NAND gate NA 66 B, and input 11 of NAND gate 115 NA 66 C are hi, since the output of AND gate A 49 B will be hi.

Next, it is assumed that zero counts have been coded into the X data or Y data words.

As shown in Fig 33, the signals A Data-N 120 or B data-N which are formed from such a data word are both hi Referring to Fig 211, since the inputs of NOR gate NO 39 B are hi, input 5 of AND gate A 49 C is lo, and input 9 of NOR gate NO 39 C is also lo Since 125 the input to inverter 164 B from the signal B Data-N is hi, the inverted signal at input 4 of NAND gate NA 66 B is lo, and the output of this gate is hi Similarly, the input to inverter 164 C is hi, and the output of the 130 1,570,244 inverter at input 9 of NAND gate NA 66 C is lo, resulting in a hi condition at the output of this gate It will be seen that input 11 of NOR gate N 026 C and input 9 of NOR gate N 026 D are both hi Also, both inputs of NAND gate NA 49 A are hi, resulting in a lo output of this gate Since both inputs to NOR gate N 039 C are lo, the signals at input 11 of NOR gate N 014 B and input 5 of NOR gate N 026 A are both hi The lo signal from gate NA 49 A is inverted by inverter 164 A, resulting in a hi condition at input 2 of NOR gate N 014 C and input 3 of NOR gate N 026 B As previously discussed, input 9 of NOR gate N 014 A and input 5 of NOR gate N 014 D are also hi Thus, all of the NOR gates on chips 594 and 596 have a hi input when the corresponding X or Y data corresponding Y Strobe-N or X StrobeN signal goes lo, the outputs from the NOR gates on chips 594 and 596 remain lo, and none of the flip flops on chips 598-604 are set Since these flip flops were previously reset during initialization of the memory cycle by the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P, none of the corresponding outputs of the flip flops are set lo Thus, if the Y data word is zero, the signals YA Pulse Inhibit-N, YB Pulse Inhibit-N, YC Pulse Inhibit-N, and Y Decode 4 Plus-N from the flip flops remain hi Similarly, if the X data word represents zero pulses, the signals XA Pulse Inhibit-N, XB Pulse Inhibit-N, XC Pulse Inhibit-N, and X Decode 4 Plus-N all remain hi.

The next condition-discussed is the case when the V or Y data word has one count, such that the A Data-N signal formed is lo and the signal B Data-N is hi, as shown in Fig 33 In this case, the input 2 of NOR gate N 039 B is hi, resulting in a lo signal at input 5 of AND gate A 49 C Accordingly, input 9 of NOR gate N 039 C is also lo Since the input to inverter 164 B is hi, input 4 of NAND gate NA 66 B is lo and the output of this gate is hi The lo input of inverter 164 C is inverted to a hi condition at input 9 of NAND gate NA 66 C Input 10 of NAND gate NA 66 C is also hi since connected to the signal B Data-N It will be recalled that input 11 of NAND gate NA 66 C, is also hi at this, since connected to the hi output of AND gate A 49 B, which resulted from the hi conditions for the signals C Data-N and D DataN Since all inputs of NAND gate NA 66 C are hi, its output is lo Thus, input 11 of NOR gate N 026 C is lo, and input 9 of NOR gate N 026 D is also lo Since input 13 of NAND gate NA 49 A is lo, its output is hi.

Since input 8 of NOR gate N 039 C is hi, its output is lo, resulting in lo signals at input 11 of NOR gate N 014 B and input 5 of NOR gate N 026 A The hi output from NAND gate NA 49 A is inverted by inverter 164 A, resulting in a lo signal at input 2 of NOR gate N 014 C and input 3 of NOR gate N 026 B. Accordingly, all of the above discussed inputs to the NOR gates on chips 594 and 70 596 will be lo, except input 9 of gate N 014 A and input 5 of gate N 014 D which are hi.

If the conditioned gates on chips 594 and 596 represent the Y data word, when the lo Y Strobe-N signal is received, the follow 75 ing flip flops are set: 027 B, f 115 B, and ff 3 B. Thus, the signals YA Pulse Inhibit-N, YB Pulse Inhibit-N, and YC Pulse Inhibit-N are set lo If the conditioned gates on the chips 594 and 596 represent the X data word, 80 when the lo X Strobe-N signal is received, the following flip flops are set: f#27 A, I 715 A, and f 14 A Accordingly, the signals XA Pulse Inhibit-N, XB Pulse Inhibit-N, and XC Pulse Inhibit-N are set lo at this time 85 Thus, it has been seen that when the Y data word has one count, all of the Y pulse inhibit flip flops are set except the flip flop 94 B having the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N.

Similarly, when the X data word represents 90 one pulse, all of the X pulse inhibit flip flops are set except the flip flop #334 having the output signal X Decode 4 PlusN The configuration of the inhibit signals from these flip flops corresponding to one 95 pulse in the X data or Y data word is shown in the right hand portion of Fig 33.

It is next assumed that the X data or Y data words contain two counts As shown in Fig 33, in this case the corresponding A 100 Data-N signal is hi, while the B Data-N signal is lo Since input 3 of NOR gate N 039 B is hi, input 5 of AND gate A 49 C is lc, and input 9 of NOR gate N 039 C is also lo.

Since the input to inverter 164 B is lo, input 105 4 of NAND gate NA 66 B is hi Also, input 3 of gate NA 66 B is hi, since it is connected to the A Data-N signal As previously discussed, input 5 of NAND gate NA 66 B is also hi since connected to the output of 110 AND gate A 49 B, which has its inputs connected to the hi C Data-N and D Data-N signals Accordingly, the output of NAND gate NA 66 B at input 12 of NAND gate NA 49 A is lo Thus, the output of gate 115 NA 49 A is hi, and the output of NOR gate N 039 C is lo Thus, input 11 of NOR gate N 014 B and input 5 of NOR gate N 026 A are both lo The hi signal from NAND gate NA 49 A is inverted by inverter I 64 A, result 120 ing in a lo condition at input 2 of NOR gate N 014 C and input 3 of NOR gate N 026 B. Since input 10 of NAND gate NA 66 C is lo, the output of this gate is hi, and input 11 of NOR gate N 026 C and 125 input 9 of NOR gate N 026 D are both hi.

Corresponding to the Y data word, when the signal Y Strobe-N goes lo, the following flip flops are set: f 15 B, and fi 3 B Thus, only the signals YB Pulse Inhibit-N and 130 1,570,244 YC Pulse Inhibit-N are set lo at this time, as indicated in Fig 33 For the case of the X data word, when the signal X Strobe-N goes lo, the following flip flops are set: f 14 A, and ff SA Thus, only the signals XB Pulse Inhibit-N and XC Pulse Inhibit-N are set lo at this time, as indicated in Fig 33 The remaining outputs of the flip flops, which were reset at the start of the memory cycle by the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P, remain hi.

Finally, the case in which the X data or Y data words contain 3 counts is discussed.

As shown in Fig 33, the resulting signals A Data-N and B Data-N are both lo or zero.

Referring to Fig 211, input 3 of NAND gate NA 66 B and input 10 of NAND gate NA 66 C are both lo, resulting in hi signals at the outputs of both of these gates Thus S input 11 of NOR gate N 026 C and input 9 of NOR gate N 026 D are both hi Since both inputs to NAND gate NA 49 A are hi, its output is lo The lo signal is inverted by inverter 164 A, and input 2 of NOR gate NO 14 C and input 3 of NOR gate N 026 B are both conditioned hi Also, input 8 of NOR gate N 039 C is lo at this time Since both inputs to NOR gate NO 39 B are lo, its output is hi.

As previously discussed, the output of AND gate A 49 B is hi, since its inputs are connected to the hi signals C Data-N and D Data-N Thus, the output of AND gate A 49 C is hi, resulting in a lo signal at the output of NOR gate N 039 C Accordingly, input 11 of NOR gate NO 14 B and input 5 of NOR gate N 026 A are both lo.

For the case of the Y data word, when the Y Strobe-N signal goes lo, only flip flop #33 B is set, resulting in a lo condition for the signal YC Pulse Inhibit-N Similarly, when the gates on chips 594 and 596 are conditioned for the X data word and the X Strobe-N signal later goes lo, only flip flop f 8 15 A is set, resulting in a lo condition for the signal XC Pulse Inhibit-N As previously noted, all of the flip flops were reset by the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P at the start of the memory cycle, and the other outputs of the X or Y pulse inhibit flip flops remain hi.

At this point, the configurations of the X and Y pulse inhibit flip flops corresponding to the various counts of the X and Y data words have been discussed As previously noted, the outputs of the inhibit flip flops ft 3 A, /J 3 B, #14 A, f 14 B, 215 A, fll SB, f#27 A, and f 127 B may be determined from the data words by making reference to the inhibit signals listed in Fig 33.

It will be recalled that during the third phase of the memory cycle, in response to the third pulse in the pulse train Clock Pulse, the control word from the PROM is formed as the inverted signals A Data-N, B Data-N, C Data-N, and D Data-N Referring to Fig 30, the control word is formed as the Data-N signals as follows The low order bit specifying the direction for the Y stepping motor is inverted, such that a lo condition for the signal A Data-N indicates a +Y direction, while a hi signal indicates 70 a -Y direction Similarly, if the signal B Data-N is hi, it specifies a -X direction for the X stepping motor, while a lo state for B Data-N indicates a +X direction for this stepping motor The two high order bits for 75 the Mode Code are inverted as the signals C Data-N and D Data-N Thus, if both signals C Data-N and D Data-N are hi, a Stop Stitch Mode has been commanded If the C Data-N signal is lo and the D Data-N signal 80 is hi a Stitch Mode was programmed in the control word If the C Data-N signal is hi and the D Data-N signal is lo a Slow Stitch Mode was commanded, while if both of the Data-N signals are lo, an End of Program 85 Mode was selected.

As previously discussed in connection with Fig 21 j, the Data-N signals are decoded by register or circuitry R 47 in response to the leading edge of the hi signal 90 EMC-P If a Stop Stitch Mode has been commanded by the control word, as reflected by the inverted C Data-N and D Data-N signals, the following configuration is formed at the output of the register R 47: output 95 14 is lo, output 16 is hi, output 1 is lo, and output 15 is hi Thus, input 1 of NAND gate NA 35 A and input 4 of NAND gate NA 35 B are both lo, and the outputs of both of these gates are hi Accordingly, input 12 10 Q of NOR gate N 036 A and input 8 of NOR gate N 036 B are both hi Also, input 12 of NAND gate NA 35 D is lo, and the output of this gate is hi, resulting in a hi signal at input 3 of NOR gate N 036 D However, it 105 may be seen that inputs 9 and 10 of NAND gate NA 35 C are both hi, resulting in a lo condition at input 6 of NOR gate N 036 C.

As previously discussed, the normal condition for the signal EMC-P is lo, such that 110 the output of inverter 152 C is hi It follows that the outputs of the four NOR gates on chip 606 are normally lo However, when the signal EMC-P goes hi and the output of inverter 152 C goes lo, a lo signal is formed 115 at input 11 of NOR gate N 036 A, input 9 of NOR gate NO 36 B, input 5 of NOR gate N 036 C, and input 2 of NOR gate N 036 D.

The Data-N signals are decoded by register R 47 at the time the signal EMC-P goes hi, 120 and the NOR gates on chip 606 are conditioned by the pulse EMC-P before the single-shot S 563 B times out, and before the signal EMC-P returns lo In the case under discussion, input 6 of NOR gate NO 36 C has 125 been set lo, and, since this input is in a lo condition while the signal at input 5 of gate N 036 C is still lo, i e, before the signal EMC-P returns to its lo state, a positive pulse is formed at the output of this gate as 130 1,570,244 the signal Stop Stitch-P Since one of the inputs to the remaining gates on chip 606 are hi, their outputs Stitch-P, End of ProgramP, and Slow Stitch-P remain lo The pulse Stop Stitch-P is used to set the control system in the Stop Stitch Mode, as will be seen below.

Next, it is assumed that the C Data-N and D Data-N signals indicate that a Stitch Command for fast speed of the machine has been programmed in the control word The resulting output configuration of the register R 47 when set by the leading edge of the hi pulse EMC-P is as follows: output 14 is hi, output 16 is hi, output 1 is lo, and output is lo Thus, input 5 of NAND gate NA 35 B, input 10 of NAND gate NA 35 C, and inputs 12 and 13 of NAND gate NA 35 D are all lo, resulting in hi output signals from these gates It will be seen that input 8 of NOR gate N 036 B, input 6 of NOR gate N 036 C, and input 3 of NOR gate N 036 D are all hi, and these gates are inhibited with their output signals End of Program-P, Stop Stitch-P, and Slow Stitch-P being lo However, both inputs to NAND gate NA 35 A are hi, resulting in a lo signal at input 12 of NOR gate N 036 A, and a positive pulse for the signal Stitch-P before the signal EMC-P goes lo The pulse Stitch-P results in the Stitch Mode of the control system and machine, as will be discussed below.

Next, it is assumed that the C Data-N and D Data-N signals reflect a Slow Stitch Command, resulting in an output configuration for the register R 47 as follows: outputs 14 and 16 are lo, and outputs 1 and 15 are hi.

Thus, inputs 1 and 2 of NAND gate NA 33 A are both lo, input 4 of NAND gate NA 35 B is lo, and input 9 of NAND gate NA 35 C is lo, resulting in hi output signals for these three gates Accordingly, input 12 of NOR gate NO 36 A, input 8 of NOR gate NO 36 B, and input 6 of NOR gate N 036 C are all hi, resulting in a lo condition for the signals Stitch-P, End of Program-P, and Stop Stitch-P However, both inputs to NAND gate NA 35 D are hi, resulting in a lo signal at input 3 of NOR gate NO 36 D, and a hi pulse for the signal Slow Stitch-P at which time the system enters the Slow Stitch Mode, as will be discussed in detail below.

Finally, it is assumed that the C Data-N and D Data-N signals reflect an End of Program Command in the control word The resulting output configuration of the register R 47 is as follows: outputs 14 and 1 of the register are hi, while outputs 16 and 15 of the register are lo Thus, input 2 of NAND gate NA 35 A is le, inputs 9 and 10 of NAND gate NA 35 C are lo, and inputs 13 of NAND gate NA 35 D is also lo, resulting in hi output signals for these three gates Accordingly, input 12 of NOR gate NO 336 A, input 6 of NOR gate N 036 C, and input 3 of NOR gate N 036 D are all hi, resulting in lo conditions for the signals Stitch-P, Stop Stitch-P, and Slow Stitch-P However, both inputs to NAND gate NA 35 B are hi, resulting in a lo signal at input 8 of NOR gate N 036 B, 70 and formation of a positive pulse for the signal End of Program-P In response, the system enters the End of Program Mode, as will be seen below.

The A Data-N and B Data-N signals are 75 also decoded by register R 47 in response to the pulse EMC-P to form the signals XProm Dir-P and Y Prom Dir-P for use in controlling the direction of the X and Y stepping motors As shown in Fig 21 e, the 80 signal X Prom Dir-P is connected to input 1 of AND gate A 133 A The other input 2 of this gate is connected to the signal Basic Home-N which is hi at this time Thus, if the signal X Prom Dir-P is hi, input 5 of 85 NOR gate N 0134 C is also hi, while if the signal X Prom Dir-P is lo, input 5 of gate N 0134 C is Jo The input 3 of AND gate A 133 B is connected to the signal Basic Home-P which is lo at this time, and, ac 90 cordingly, input 6 of NOR gate N 0134 C is also lo Thus, the NOR gate N 0134 C inverts the signal at its input 5 as the signal X Direction for use in controlling the direction of the X stepping motor 95 The use of the signal Y Prom Dir-P is very similar As shown, this signal is connected to input 5 of AND gate A 133 C, with the other input of this gate being connected to the hi signal Basic Home-N The input 7 100 of AND gate A 133 D is connected to the signal Basic Home-P which is lo, resulting in a lo signal at input 8 of NOR gate NO 134 D Accordingly, it will be seen that the signal Y Prom Dir-P is inverted by the 105 NOR gate N 0134 D to form the signal Y Direction which is utilized to control the direction of the Y stepping motor.

As previously indicated, the register R 47 may comprise any suitable device for decod 110 ing the Data-N signals, such as four D-type flip flops of the type discussed in connection with Fig 21 e As shown in Fig 21 n, the signal EMC-P may be connected to the CLK inputs of each of the flip flops, such that the 115 flip flop outputs reflect their corresponding D inputs when the signal EMC-P goes hi.

The first flip flop f 1120 A may have its D input connected to the signal C Data-N Its Q output may be used as output 14 of regi 120 ster R 47, and its Q bar output may be utilized as output 15 of the register The second flip flop f 1120 B may have its D input connected to the signal D Data-N, with its Q output being used as output 1 of register 125 R 47, and with its Q bar output being utilized as output 16 of the register In this manner, the flip flops ff 120 A and f 120 BB may be utilized to decode the signals C Data-N and D Data-N when the signal EMC-P goes hi, 130 1,570,244 as described above Similarly, the signals A Data-N and B Data-N may be connected to the D inputs of the flip flops fi 120 C and if 120 D, respectively, with the Q or Q bar outputs of these flip flops being used as the signals Y Prom Dir-P and X Prom Dir-P, depending upon the direction relationship between the signals X and Y Direction and the corresponding direction information in the control word for the stepping motors.

Since the most usual Mode Code utilized in the control words during operation of the sewing machine is the Stitch Command, during which the machine operates at fast speed, the corresponding Stitch Mode will be discussed first It will be recalled that a positive pulse is formed for the signal StitchP in response to this command As Shown in Fig 21 g, the signal X Strobe-N is inverted by inverter I 41 A, and the inverted signal is connected to input 6 of flip flop 857 A Since the signal X Strobe-N is normally hi, the inverted signal at the flip flop is lo Before the control word has been decoded, when the signal X Strobe-N goes temporarily lo, the inverted hi signal resets the flip flop with its output Stch-l P lo, and with output Stch-OP hi At a later time, the pulse Stitch-P is passed through OR gate 043 C to input 2 of flip flop f 257 A, thus setting this flip flop As previously discussed, the other input to OR gate 043 C, the signal Slow Stitch-P, is lo at this time The outputs of flip flop f 157 A are set as follows: the signal Stch-1 P is set hi, and the signal StchOP is set lo.

Turning now to Fig 211, if either of the inputs to NOR gate N 044 D are hi, the output of this gate is lo As previously discussed, the normal condition for the signal NTB Mode-OP is hi, and, accordingly, the input 2 of AND gate A 70 D is normally lo, while input 4 of NAND gate NA 70 C is also normally lo Accordingly, the signal Aux Start-P at the output of AND gate A 70 D is normally lo The normal condition for the signal Cond Go-P is hi, and only if both inputs to NOR gate N 044 D are lo, will the signal Aux Start-P and input 4 of NAND gate NA 70 C be hi.

Assuming the normal condition, since input 4 of NAND gate NA 70 C is lo, input 9 of NAND gate NA 70 B is hi When the positive pulse Stitch-P is received, the pulse is inverted by inverter 183 D, and a lo pulse is formed at input 10 of NAND gate NA 70 B. Accordingly, a hi pulse is formed at the output of NAND gate NA 70 B, thus setting flip flop #i 84 A at its inputs 2, with its output 1 being set lo and with its output 4 being set hi, resulting in a hi condition for the signal Stitch Mode-P which indicates the system is in the Stitch Mode.

It is noted that the stitch flip flop f#84 A is reset during initialization by the signal Reset-N, with its output 1 being set hi, and with the signal Stitch Mode-P being set lo.

When the stitch flip flop is set, its input 6 is lo, which may be determined as follows.

Both of the signals Slow Stitch-P and End 70 of Program-P, which are connected to the input of NOR gate N 044 C, are lo, resulting in a hi condition at input 13 of NAND gate NA 70 A Referring to Fig 21 h, the signal NTB Mode-OP is normally hi, and only 75 goes lo in case of a thread break at determined by the Thread Break Sensor Accordingly, the signal NTB Mode-P at the output of inverter I 19 E is normally lo When the Thread Break Sensor detects a thread break, 80 and the signal NTB Mode-OP goes lo, the signal NTB Mode-P goes hi At this time the diflerentiator circuit 610 of Fig 211 generates a positive pulse at the input of inverter 183 C, resulting in a lo pulse at input 85 12 of NAND gate, and as the signal NTB Mode Pulse-N, which would result in a hi pulse at input 6 of flip flop f#84 A, thus resetting this flip flop In the absence of a thread break, the condition of the signal at 90 the input of inverter 183 C is lo, resulting in a hi condition at input 12 of NAND gate NA 70 A Accordingly, the output of gate NA 70 A and the input 6 of flip flop #84 A is normally lo 95 After the stitch flip flop #84 A has been set, in response to the pulse Stitch-P, a lo signal is established at input 12 of OR gate 084 B As previously discussed, the signal Clamp Mode-OP was set lo before entering 100 the homing mode, and, accordingly, input 1 of the driver circuit DC 72 A is lo at this time As shown in Fig 21 m, the signal Normal/Service -Select, and input 2 of driver circuit DC 72 A, will be lo if the Normal/ 105 Service Select Switch is set at its Normal terminal, while the signals will be hi if the switch is set at its Service terminal Accordingly, during normal operation of the machine, while the switch is at its Normal set 110 ting, both inputs to driver circuits DC 72 A are lo.

The output 3 of driver circuit DC 72 A is related to the inputs of the circuit as follows If either of the inputs is hi, the output 115 of the driver circuit is also hi, resulting in operation of the machine at its low speed.

Conversely, if both inputs of the driver circuit DC 72 A are lo, the output of the circuit is also lo, resulting in fast speed opera 120 tion of the machine Accordingly, during normal operation of the machine, when the pulse Stitch-P is received, both inputs to driver circuit DC 72 A will be lo, the output of the circuit will be lo, and the following 125 events take place A relay is closed which activates a triac, resulting in energization of the main brake/ clutch solenoid of the Quick device It will be recalled in connection with Fig 17, the energized solenoid results in 130 so 1,570,244 engagement of the disc 430 against the clutch surface 436 of the flywheel 422, such that the machine is driven at its fast speed Once the flip flop U 84 A has been set in the Stitch Mode, the brake/clutch solenoid remains energized until the flip flop has been reset, assuming that the Normal/Service Select Switch is at its Normal terminal and that the signal Clamp Mode-OP does not go hi, and the needle will be reciprocated at fast speed so long as Stitch Commands are received from the PROM.

Since the stitch flip flop was reset during initialization by Reset-N, before the first pulse Stitch-P has been received, the input 1 of driver circuit DC 72 A is hi, and the main brake/clutch solenoid of the Quick device is deenergized Accordingly, at this time the disc 430 will be engaged against the main brake surface 434 of the worm wheel 432.

This condition will also prevail if the Normal/Service Select Switch is set at its Service terminal, or, as will be seen below, if a pulse is received from the signals Slow Stitch-P or End of Program-P A hi condition for either of the signals NTB Mode-P or Clamp Mode-OP will cause the same result In each case, at least one of the inputs to driver circuit DC 72 A will be in a hi condition.

Whether the disc 446 of the Quick device is engaged against the auxiliary clutch surface 448 or the auxiliary brake surface 450 depends upon the machine speed and the condition of the output signal from the driver circuit DC 88 B of Fig 21 g If the Quick device determines from the synchronization unit 62 that the machine is being operated at its slow speed, the auxiliary brake will be engaged unless the proper condition has been established at the output of driver circuit DC 88 B Satisfaction of this condition will be discussed below It is sufficient at this point that the machine will operate at fast speed when the main brake/ clutch solenoid is energized by the driver circuit DC 72 A of Fig 211, i e, during the Stitch Mode, and that the machine will operate at slow speed or will be stopped when this solenoid is deenergized.

As shown in Fig 21 g, the positive pulse Stitch-P sets flip flop f 139 B with its output 1 lo, such that input 4 of AND gate A 42 A is lo, input 8 of flip flop ff 57 B is lo, and this flip flop is not set at this time Also, the pulse Stitch-P is inverted and passed through NOR gate NO 53 A, with the resulting lo pulse resetting the slow stitch flip flop J 54 C in the event that the previous command resu Ited in the Slow Stitch Mode The flip flop is reset with its output 3 hi and its output 6 lo Accordingly, input 8 of OR gate 053 C is at a hi condition, and input 1 of driver circuit DC 88 B is also hi.

The driver circuit DC 88 B operates as follows If both inputs to the driver circuit are hi, its output signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is hi, while if either input is lo, the signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is also lo Referring to Fig 17, the Quick device is normally 70 operated with the disc 446 against the auxiliary brake surface 448 If the Quick device determines that the machine is being operated at its slow speed, through use of one of the signals from the synchronization 75 unit 62, the Quick device automatically initiates the cutting sequence and will stop the machine by moving the disc 446 against the auxiliary brake surface 450, unless prevented from doing so While the signal Quick 80 Slow Sew Cmd is lo, the Quick device will be inhibited from undertaking the cutting and stopping sequence, even though the machine is operating at slow speed If the Quick Slow Sew Cmd is hi, the Quick de 85 vice is permitted to carry out the cutting and stopping sequence, but this sequence will not be undertaken unless the Quick device determines from the unit 62 that the machine is operating at slow speed 90 If the Normal/Service Select Switch is at its Service terminal, the main brake/clutch solenoid will be deenergized and the disc 430 will be engaged against the main brake surface 434, as may be seen in connection 95 with Figs 17, 211, and 21 m Referring to Figs 21 g and 21 m, the signal Normal/Service Select will be hi at this time, as well as input 1 of NAND gate NA 42 B When the Jog Switch on the front panel is closed, the 100 Jog signal is hi, and input 2 of driver circuit DC 88 B is lo, since both inputs of NAND gate NA 42 D are hi Accordingly, the signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is lo during the Service Mode, and the Quick device is pre 105 vented from starting the cutting and stopping sequence Hence, irrespective of the command from the program control word, the machine will operate at slow speed when the Jog Switch is closed during the Service 110 Mode, although under program control.

This follows since the disc 430 of the Quick device (Fig 17) is engaged against the main brake surface 434, and the Quick device is prevented from disengaging the disc 446 from 115 the auxiliary clutch surface 448.

If the signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is hi, e.g, during the Stitch Mode, and a thread break occurs, the following sequence takes place As previously discussed in connection 120 with Figs 21 h and 211, the flip flop f 284 A will be reset responsive to a change in the signal NTB Mode-OP from hi to lo At this time, the driver circuit DC 72 A will deenergize the main brake/clutch solenoid, and 125 the disc 430 of the Quick device will be engaged against the brake surface 434 of the worm wheel 432 Accordingly, the machine will slow down to slow speed When the Quick device determines that the machine 130 1,570,244 is operating at slow speed from the synchronization unit 62, the Quick device will initiate the cutting sequence and stop the machine, since the signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is hi, and it is not prevented from undertaking this sequence.

In the Stitch Mode, if the Normal/Service Select Switch is set at the Normal setting, the signal Normal/Service Select will be lo.

Accordingly, input 1 of NAND gate NA 42 B (Fig 21 g), as well as input 9 of OR gate 053 C, will be lo Thus, the output signal from NAND gate NA 42 B will be hi, and both inputs to driver circuit DC 88 B are hi, resulting in a hi condition for signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd Thus, the cutting and stopping sequence of the Quick device may be iitiated during the Stitch Mode if a thread break is determined by the Thread Break Sensor.

As shown in Fig 21 g, when the flip flop fi 57 A is set as a result of the pulse Stitch-P during the Stitch Mode, input 9 of NOR gate N 044 B is set lo by the flip flop Also, the signal NTB Mode-P is normally lo, resuting in a hi condition at input 5 of NAND gate NA 55 C However, if a thread break had previously been detected by the Thread Break Sensor and the signal NTB Mode-P were hi, input 5 of NAND gate NA 55 C will remain lo, and the control system will be prevented from driving the stepping motors in the Stitch Mode at this time The signal Clamp Mode-l P at input 3 of NAND gate NA 55 C should be hi However, if the signal Clamp Mode-1 P is lo, this condition also prevents starting the stepping motors in the Stitch Mode At this time, the NAND gate has been conditioned with hi signals at its input 3 and 5.

As previously discussed, a positive pulse is formed as the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P when the photosensor in unit 62 indicates the clamps may be moved at the time T 4 (Fig 25) of the timing cycle At this time all three inputs of NAND gate NA 55 C are hi, resulting in formation of a lo pulse at input 10 of NAND gate NA 55 A The NAND gate NA 55 A in turn inverts and passes the pulse, resulting in formation of a positive pulse at input 11 of NOR gate N 044 A The gate N 044 A again inverts the pulse, and forms a lo pulse as the signal Start Run-N, which initiates movement of the X and Y stepping motors, as will be described below.

It may be determined that the signal Start Run-N was in a hi condition before the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P was re+ 60 waived The signal Basic Home-N is hi at this time, resulting in a hi condition at input 9 of gate NA 55 A When the flip flop f#57 A is set by the pulse Stitch-P, a lo condition is established at input 1 of NAND gate NA 55 B, resulting in a hi signal at input 11 of OR gate 043 D and a hi signal at input 11 of NAND gate NA 55 A Accordingly, all three inputs of NAND gate NA 55 A are high until the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P is received, and the input 11 of NOR gate 70 N 044 A is lo until this time Also, since the flip flop ff 39 B was reset by the pulse StitchP input 13 of AND gate A 42 C is lo, resulting in a lo signal at input 12 of NOR gate N 044 A Thus, both inputs of NOR gate 75 N 044 A are lo, resulting in a hi condition for the signal Start Run-N until the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P has been received.

Movement of the stepping motors during the Stitch Mode is described as follows Re 80 ferring to Fig 21 d, when the lo pulse Start Run-N is received, the pulse is inverted by inverter I 19 C, and a positive pulse is formed at input 2 of NOR gate NO 20 A and input 5 of NOR gate NO 20 B Accordingly, lo pulses 85 are formed at the outputs of NOR gates NO 20 A and N 020 B, thus setting the X and Y run flip flops #21 B and #32 B, respectively, with its outputs X Run-N and Y Run-N set lo, and with outputs X Run-P 90 and Y Run-P set hi.

The operation of the control system in forming pulse trains for the stepping motors and moving the clamps is similar to that described in connection with the homing 95 mode Referring to Fig 21 j, when the signals X Run-N and Y Run-N go lo, the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P are again formed from the signal LS Osc-N, as previously described It will be recalled 100 that the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P are trains of positive pulses.

It will also be recalled, with reference to Fig 21 e, that when the flip flop f#45 A was reset by the signal Homing Clear-N, the 105 signal LS Shift-N was set hi Accordingly, as described in connection with Fig 21 c, the hi signal LS Shift-N results in formation of the signal LS Osc-N at its relatively high speed The pulse trains X Count Pulse-P 110 and Y Count Pulse-P are thus formed at their relatively high rate of 850 pulses/ second.

The relative timing between the pulses in the signals X Count Pulse-P and Y Count 115 Pulse-P and the pulse trains to the stepping motor is described in connection with Fig.

34 The pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P are designated in the drawing as Clock, and the pulses in these signals 120 occur at 1 16 millisecond intervals The remaining lines illustrate the relative timing of the pulses transmitted to the stepping motors depending upon the number of pulses or counts coded in the X or Y data 125 words It will be seen that for one or more coded pulses, the Clock pulse No 1 is utilized for the stepping motors in each case with the timing being the same Of course, if no pulses have been coded into the X or 130 1,570,244 Y data word, no pulse will be output to the corresponding stepping motor If the control word indicates that two pulses should be generated for the corresponding stepping motor, the time of the first pulse to the stepping motor corresponds to Clock pulse No 1, but the Clock pulse No 2 is inhibited and a pulse A is added to the pulse train for the stepping motor 2 milliseconds after the first pulse, such that pulse A occurs between the inhibited Clock pulses Nos 2 and 3 If three pulses are to be formed for the X or Y stepping motors, the Clock pulse No 1 is used, but the Clock pulses Nos 2 and 3 are inhibited As shown, pulse A is added 2 0 milliseconds after the first pulse to the stepping motor, and a third pulse B is added 1 8 milliseconds after pulse No 3 and 2 12 milliseconds after Pulse A If four or more pulses are formed for the X or Y stepping motors, the Clock pulse No 1 is utilized for the first pulse to the stepping motors, while Clock pulses Nos 2 and 3 are again inhibited As will be seen, a pulse A is added 2 0 milliseconds after the first pulse to the stepping motor, and 1 48 milliseconds later the Clock pulse No 4 is utilized for the stepping motor Assuming that N pulses have been programmed in the control word, the Clock pulse No 5 and subsequent pulses up to, and including, the Clock pulse No (N-1) are utilized in forming the motor pulse train However, the Clock pulse No N is inhibited, and a pulse B is formed 1 8 milliseconds after Clock pulse No (N 4-1) Finally, a pulse C is added to the motor pulse train 2 2 milliseconds after pulse B. Accordingly, it will be seen that in each case for two or more pulses to the stepping motors, the basic clock rate 1 16 milliseconds has been modified, and, in particular, at the beginning and the end of the pulse trains to the stepping motors The frequency has been reduced at the start and end of the pulse trains to provide gradual acceleration and deacceleration of the stepping motors to improve their operation under upon loop control.

The formation of the pulse trains X Combo-N and Y Combo-N for the X and Y steppingmotors is discussed in connection with Fig 21 k, as follows The first condition discussed is the case when the number of pulses which will be output to the X or Y stepping motors will be one pulse, as determined by the corresponding X or Y data word It will be recalled, as discussed in connection with Fig 21 i and Fig 33, that for the condition of one pulse in the Y control word, the signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N was set hi,, while the signals YA Pulse Inhibit-N, YB Pulse Inhibit-N, and YC Pulse Inhibit-N were set lo during the memory cycle Similarly, for one count in the X control word, the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N was set hi, while the signals XA Pulse Inhibit-N, XB Pulse Inhibit-N and XC Pulse Inhibit-N were set lo It will also be recalled that signals X Direction and Y Direc 70 tion to, control the proper direction of the X and Y stepping motors have previously been formed.

Reference is now made to Figs 21 k and As discused in connection with the 75 homing mode, when the X run flip flop is set and the signal X Run-P goes hi, the differentiator circuit 524 generates a positive pulse setting flip flop f 116 A, resulting in a lo condition at pin 1 of single-shot S 528 A 80 When the first pulse in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P (Pulse No 1) is received at pin 2 of the single-shot S 528 A after the signal at its pin 1 goes lo, the single-shot is triggered resulting in a hi condition at the 85 Q output of the single-shot The relative timing of these signals is shown in Fig 35.

When the single-shot S 528 A times out and its Q output goes lo, the single-shot S 528 B is triggered at its pin 9 Accordingly, the Q 90 output of the single-shot S 528 B goes hi at this time, and the delayed hi signal at input of flip flop f 8 16 A resets the flip flop, resulting in a hi signal at pin 1 of single-shot S 528 A to inhibit this single-shot As will be 95 seen from Fig 35, the Q bar output of singleshot S 528 B is hi at the time of Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P Accordingly, the pulse No 1 is inverted by NAND gate NA 5 A, and is formed as a lo pulse at in 100 put 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A Since the signal XA Pulse Inhibit-N is lo, a hi condition is established at pin 1 of single-shot S 56 A preventing it from being triggered.

Accordingly, the Q bar output of this single 105 shot remains hi, and input 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A is also hi Additionally, since the signal XB Pulse Inhibit-N is lo, the input 9 of NAND gate NA 31 A is also hi Thus, the output of NAND gate NA 31 A is a positive 110 pulse at the time of the pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, which passes through OR gate 082 C, and triggers single-shot S 568 A at its pin 2 This pulse is regenerated by the single-shot S 568 A, and a single 115 widened lo pulse is formed at the Q bar output of the single-shot as the signal X Combo-N for driving the X stepping motor one pulse The lo signal XC Pulse Inhibit-N inhibits the single-shot S 568 B fr Qm forming 120 an XC Pulse.

As shown in Fig 21 j, the pulse train X Count Pulse-P is inverted by NOR gate NO 8 OC, and the inverted pulse train is formed at pin 2 of the X counter CT 61 125 Each of the pulses in the train will increment the counter by one count Since the information loaded into the X counter from the Data-N signals corresponds to one count or pulse, the inverted binary configura 130 responsive to Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P, the signal Y Carry-P goes hi.

Referring now to Fig 21 e, since input 6 of AND gate A 132 C is connected to the hi signal Basic Home-N, and since input 7 of 70 AND gate A 132 D is lo, the signal Y CarryP, which is connected to input 5 of gate A 132 C, is inverted by NOR gate NO 134 B to form a lo condition for the signal Y StopN Referring to Fig 21 d, the lo signal Y 75 Stop-N resets the Y run flip flop #32 B, with its outputs Y Run-P lo and Y Run-N hi.

Referring to Fig 21 j, the lo signal Y Run-N inhibits the signal Y Count Pulse-P Thus, only one lo pulse is output to the Y step 80 ping motor, and the Y counter CT 62 was only incremented once.

Next, the condition for two counts or pulses coded into the X or Y data words is discussed as follows Referring to Fig 33, 85 in this case, for the X data word the signals XA Inhibit-N and X Decode 4 Plus-N are set hi, while the signals XB Inhibit-N and XC Inhibit-N are set lo The Y inhibit flip flops are set in a similar manner correspond 90 ing to the Y data word As before, when the X and Y run flip flops f J 21 B, #f 32 B in Fig.

21 d are set, the outputs X Run-N and Y Run-N are set lo, and the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P (Fig 95 21 j) are initiated Referring to Figs 21 k and 36, when the signal X Run-P goes hi, the flip flop f#1 16 A is set, the signal at pin 1 of single-shot S 528 A goes lo, and the single-shot is triggered by Pulse No 1 in 100 the pulse train X Count Pulse-P, at which time the Q output of this single-shot goes hi Since the single-shot S 528 B is not triggered until the single shot S 528 A times out, the Q bar output of single-shot S 528 B is hi 105 at the time of Pulse No 1 Accordingly, Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P is inverted by NAND gate NA 5 A, and a lo pulse is formed at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A When the single-shot S 528 A times 110 out and its Q output goes lo, the single-shot S 528 B is triggered At this time, the Q output of the single-shot S 528 B goes hi, and the delayed output signal resets flip flop f#1 16 A The reset flip flop inhibits single 115 shot S 528 A before the Pulse No 2 in the signal X Count Pulse-P is received to prevent triggering this single-shot again Also, when the single-shot S 528 B is triggered its Q bar output goes lo As shown in Fig 36, 120 the Q bar output of the single-shot S 528 B is lo during the time of Pulse No 2 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, since it does not time out until after receipt of this pulse Accordingly, during this time the signal from 125 the single-shot S 528 B to NAND gate NA 5 A is lo to prevent passage of Pulse No 2 thrugh this NAND gate.

Since the signals XA Inhibit-N and LS Shift-N are hi, the single-shot S 56 A is en 130 tion in the counter is 1110 When the X counter is counted once, in response to the fist pulse in the pulse train X Count PulseP, the counter is counted up to its full register or the binary configuration of 111, at which time the counter output signal X Carry-P goes from lo to hi As shown in Fig 21 e, the signal X Carry-P is connected to input 3 of AND gate A 132 B The other input of the AND gate is connected to the signal Basic Home-N which is hi at this time Since the lo signal Basic Home-P is connected to input 2 of AND gate A 132 A, input 1 of NOR gate NO 134 A is lo Accordingly, the hi signal X Carry-P is inverted by NOR gate NO 134 A as a lo condition for the signal X Stop-N As shown in Fig 21 d, the signal X Stop-N resets the X run flip flop f 21 B, with its output X Run-N hi and its output X Run-P lo As shown in Fig 21 j, the lo signal X Run-N inhibits further formation of pulses in the train X Count Pulse-P, and this signal only contained one pulse for the case under discussion.

Also, the counter CT 61 was incremented one time corresponding to this single pulse, and the signal to the X stepping motor, X Combo-N, contained only the one lo regenerated pulse at the time of the Pulse No.

1 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P.

Assuming that one pulse was coded in the Y data worcd, the operation of the control system in operating the Y stepping motor is similar to that discussed above. The pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is started

when the signal Y Run-N goes lo, as discussed in connection with Fig 21 j Referring to Fig 21 k, when the signal Y Run-P goes hi, the flip flop f 16 B is triggered to condition single-shot S 540 A which is triggered by Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count PulseP The same pulse No 1 is inverted by the NAND gate NA 29 A, since the Q bar output of single-shot S 540 B is hi at this time Since the signal YA Pulse Inhibit-N is lo, singleshot S 530 A is inhibited, and input 4 of NAND gate NA 31 B remains hi Since the signal YB Pulse Inhibit-N is lo, input 3 of NAND gate NA 31 B is also hi Accordingly, one lo pulse at input 5 of NAND gate NA 31 B is inverted by this gate, and a positive pulse is formed at input 10 of single-shot S 569 A after passage through OR gate 082 D The single-shot regenerates this pulse, and forms a single lo widened pulse at its Q bar output as the signal Y Combo-N for driving the Y stepping motor one pulse The lo signal YC Pulse Inhibit-N inhibits the single-shot S 569 B from forming a YC Pulse.

As shown in Fig 21 j, the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is inverted by NOR gate NO 104 D, and an inverted pulse train is formed at pin 2 of Y counter CT 62 When the Y counter is incremented by one count, 1,570,244 1,570,244 abled by a lo signal at its input 1 When the single-shot S 528 A is triggered and its Q output goes hi, the single-shot S 56 A is triggered and its Q bar output goes lo at the time of Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P The delay in the single-shot S 56 A is such that the single-shot times out 2 milliseconds after it is triggered, at which time its Q bar output goes hi At this time, the differentiator circuit 526 generates a positive pulse which is inverted by inverter 156 A, and a lo pulse is formed at input 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A Since the signal XB Pulse Inhibit-N is lo, a high signal is formed at input 9 of NAND gate NA 31 A Thus, as shown in Fig 36, the signal formed at the output 8 of gate NA 31 A comprises a positive pulse at the time of the Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P and a positive XA Pulse 2 milliseconds later when the single-shot S 56 A times out These pulses are regenerated by the single-shot S 568 A, and are formed into a corresponding pulse train of lo widened pulses as the signal X Combo-N for control of the X stepping motor Since the signal XC Pulse Inhibit-N is lo at this time, formation of an XC Pulse by single-shot S 568 B is prevented Accordingly, as shown in Fig 36, the first pulse to the X stepping motor occurs at the time of Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, and the second XA Pulse is formed 2 milliseconds later to reduce the frequency between the pulses in the signal X Count Pulse-P.

Referring to Fig 21 j, each pulse in the signal X Count Pulse-P counts the X counter CT 61 by one count, and on the second count the inverted data in the counter is incremented to full register It should be noted that counting of the X counter in synchronized to the formation procedure of the motor pulse train X Combo-N by the signal X Count Pulse-P When the counter has been incremented twice, the hi X Carry-P signal is formed, and the X run flip flop shown in Fig 21 d is reset In turn, counting of the X counter CT 61 is stopped, and the X Count Pulse-P pulse train is inhibited, thus terminating movement of the X stepping motor and the clamps in the X direction.

It will be apparent that operation of the system in driving the Y stepping motor for the case of two counts in the Y control word is very similar to that described in connection with the X stepping motor Referring to Fig 21 k, the Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P is inverted by the NAND gate NA 29 A, and is utilized to form the first lo regenerated pulse in the signal Y Combo-N at the time of Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P After the signal Y Run-P goes hi, the single-shot S 540 A is triggered by Pulse No 11, resulting in triggering of the single-shot S 530 A, since the signals LS Shift-N and YA Pulse Inhibit-N are hi at this time When the Q bar output of the single-shot S 530 A times out 2 milliseconds after being triggered, the differen 70 tiator circuit 540 generates a positive pulse which is inverted and formed as a lo pulse at input 4 of NAND gate NA 31 B Thus, the single-shot S 569 A is triggered 2 milliseconds after Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count 75 Pulse-P, and forms the second lo pulse in the signal Y Combo-N for control of the Y stepping motor Referring to Fig 21 j, the Y counter CT 62 is counted twice by the inverted signal Y Count Pulse-P resulting in 80 a hi Y Carry-P signal responsive to the second pulse At this time, a lo condition is obtained for the signal Y Stop-N which resets the Y run flip flop ff 32 B (Fig 21 d).

In turn the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is 85 inhibited, thus preventing formation of further pulses for the Y stepping motor and further counting of the Y counter CT 62.

Next, the condition for three counts in the X or Y control words is discussed as fol 90 lows In this case, as described in connection with Fig 33, the corresponding XC or YC Pulse Inhibit-N signals are lo, while the corresponding signals XA or YA Pulse InhibitN, XB or YB Pulse Inhibit-N, and X or Y 95 Decode 4 Plus-N are hi As before, when the X and Y run flip flops are set and the signals X Run-N and Y Run-N go lo, the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P are started As shown in Figs 21 k 100 and 37, when the Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P is received, the Q bar output of single-shot S 528 B is hi, and the Pulse No 1 is inverted by NAND gate NA 5 A and formed as a lo pulse at input 10 of NAND 105 gate NA 31 A The signal X Run-P sets the flip flop f 16 A and the single-shot S 528 A is then triggered by the Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse P As before, the single-shot S 528 B is triggered by the Q out 110 put of single-shot S 528 A when single-shot S 528 A times out, and the delayed Q output of the single-shot S 528 B resets flip flop lf 16 A to inhibit the single-shot S 528 A from being further triggered at this time As 115 shown in Fig 37, the single-shot S 528 B does not time out until after receipt of the Pulse No 3 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, and accordingly, the Q bar output of this single-shot is lo during the time of the Pulses 120 Nos 2 and 3 in this pulse train Thus, singleshot S 528 B prevents passage of Pulses Nos.

2 and 3 through NAND gate NA 5 A to NAND gate NA 31 A.

As before, the single-shot S 56 A is trig 125 gered by the Q output of the single-shot S 528 A at the time Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P is received, since the signals XA Pulse Inhibit-N and LS Shift-N are both hi at this time to enable the single 130 1,570,244 shot with a lo signal at its input 1 Agairy, the single-shot S 56 A times out 2 milliseconds after being triggered, and the differentiator circuit 526 generates a positive pulse, which is inverted by inverter 156 A and formed as a lo pulse at input 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A, 2 milliseconds after Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P.

As shown in Figs 34 and 37, the XA Pulse formed at input 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A occurs between the Pulses Nos 2 and 3 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P which have been inhibited Referring to Fig 21 j, as previously described, each of the inverted pulses of the signal X Count Pulse-P count the X counter CT 61, and when the counter has been incremented three times by Pulses Nos.

1, 2, and 3, a hi condition for the X CarryP signal is received In turn, the X run flip flop ff 21 B (Fig 21 d), is reset, as previously described, thus inhibiting the pulse train X Count Pulse-P.

It will be recalled in connection with Fig.

21 d that the signal X Run-N goes from lo to hi when the X run flip flop f 12 l B is reset Referring now to Fig 21 k, when the signal X Run-N goes hi, the signal is inverted twice by inverters 17 C and 17 D, such that the output of inverter 117 D goes from lo to hi at this time, and differentiator circuit 512 generates a positive pulse at pin 10 of single-shot S 56 B It will be recalled that the signal Basic Home-P is now lo, and, accordingly, the signal Homing Mode-OP is also lo at pin 9 of single-shot S 56 B to enable the single-shot Accordingly, the pulse at pin of single-shot S 56 B triggers the singleshot and the Q bar output of the single-shot goes lo at the time of the Pulse No 3 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P This single-shot is utilized to form an XB Pulse which occurs 1 8 milliseconds after Pulse No 3 and 2 12 milliseconds after the XA Pulse Accordingly, the single-shot S 56 B times out 1 8 milliseconds after Pulse No.

3 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P When the single-shot S 56 B times out and its Q bar output goes hi, differentiator circuit 532 generates a positive pulse at input 13 of NAND gate NA 5 C Since the signal Xb Pulse Inhibit-N is hi at this time, the generated pulse is inverted, and is formed as a lo pulse at input 9 of NAND gate NA 31 A.

Accordingly, positive pulses are formed at the output of NAND gate NA 31 A as follows The first pulse is formed at the time of the Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, the second XA Pulse is formed 2 milliseconds later, and the third XB Pulse is formed 2 12 milliseconds after the XA Pulse As discussed, the Pulses Nos 2 and 3 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P have been inhibited Thus, the single-shot S 568 A regenerates these three pulses and forms the corresponding lo pulse train of regenerated pulses as the signal X Comibo-N for control of the X stepping motor.

The formation of the pulse train for the Y stepping motor in the case of three counts in the Y data word is very similar to that 70 described in connection with the X circuitry.

Referring to Fig 21 k Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P is inverted by NAND gate NA 29 A and is utilized to form the first lo pulse in the signal Y Combo-N at the 75 time of the Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P When the signal Y Run-P previously went hi, the flip flop #166 B was set, and the single-shot S 540 A was triggered by Pulse No 1 Since the signals Ya Pulse 80 Inhibit-N and LS Shift-N are both hi, the single-shot S 530 A is triggered by the singleshot S 540 A at the time of Pulse No 1 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P The singleshot S 530 A times out 2 milliseconds after 85 being triggered, and the resulting pulse generated by the differentiator circuit 540 results in formation of a regenerated lo YA Pulse in the signal Y Combo-N 2 milliseconds after the first pulse Referring to 90 Fig 21 j, at the time of Pulse No 3 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P, the Y counter CT 62 has been counted 3 counts resulting in a hi condition for the signal Y Carry-P, and the Y run flip flop ft 32 B (Fig 21 d), is reset 95 Referring to Fig 21 d, when the Y run flip flop 1 j 32 B is reset, the signal Y Run-N goes from lo to hi As shown in Fig 21 k, the signal Y Run-N is inverted twice by the inverters 17 E and I 7 F, and when the signal 100 Y Run-N and the output of inverter I 7 F goes hi, the differentiator circuit 514 generates a positive pulse at pin 2 of single-shot S 530 B. As previously discussed, the signal Homing Mode-OP is lo at this time, and the pulse 105 at pin 2 of single-shot S 530 B triggers the single-shot The single-shot is set to time out 1.8 milliseconds after Pulse No 3 and 2 12 milliseconds after the YA Pulse is formed.

When the single-shot times out and its Q 110 bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 542 generates a positive pulse at input 5 of NAND gate NA 29 D Since the signal Yb Pulse Inhibit-N is hi, the pulse is inverted by the gate NA 29 D and is formed as a lo 115 pulse at input 3 of NAND gate NA 31 B. This pulse is utilized to trigger the singleshot S 569 A and form the regenerated YB pulse in the pulse train Y Combo-N 2 12 milliseconds after receipt of the YA Pulse 120 When the X or Y data word has three counts, the corresponding signal Xc Pulse Inhibit-N, Yc Pulse Inhibit-N is lo Acccordingly, the corresponding input to pin 10 of single-shot S 568 B or to pin 2 of single-shot 125 569 B is lo, and the corresponding singleshot is inhibited for this condition of the X or Y data words Accordingly, an XC or YC pulse is not formed for the corresponding state of 3 counts in the X or Y data 130 1,570,244 words, and the corresponding pulse trains X or Y Combo-N are completed with the XB or YB Pulse.

The condition of four or more pulses in the X or Y data words is described as follows.

In this case, as shown in Fig 33, the corresponding signal X or Y Decode 4 Plus-N is lo, while the corresponding signals XA or YA Pulse Inhibit-N, XB or YB Pulse Inhibit-N and XC or YC Pulse Inhibit-N are hi irrespective of the number of counts in the data words above three For convenience, a specific example of six counts coded into the X and Y data words will be discussed.

As before, the X and Y run flip flops f L 21 B and ff 32 B (Fig 21 d) are set, and the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P are started when the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P has been received Referring to Figs 21 k and 38, the Q bar output of the single-shot S 528 B will be hi at the time Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P is received Accordingly, the Pulse No 1 is inverted by NAND gate NA 5 A, and is formed as a lo pulse at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A, resulting in a hi pulse at the output of gate NA 31 A, and a regenerated lo pulse for the signal X Combo-N at the time of Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P As previously described, when the signal X Run-P goes hi, the flip flop f 1 16 A is set, and the single-shot S 528 A is then triggered by the pulse No 1 of the signal X Count Pulse-P The single-shot S 528 A times out before receipt of Pulse No 2 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, and the singleshot S 528 B is triggered at this time.

Thus, the Q output of the single-shot S 528 B goes hi before receipt of the Pulse No.

2 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, and the flip flop #16 A is reset to inhibit the singleshot S 528 A before the Pulse No 2 has been received The single-shot S 528 B times out between Pulses Nos 3 and 4 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P, at which time the Q bar output of the single-shot S 528 B returns hi Accordingly, the NAND gate NASA is inhibited during the time of the Pulses Nos.

2 and 3 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, and input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A remains hi during this time.

Since the signals Xa Pulse Inhibit-N and LS Shift-N are both hi, the signal at pin 1 single-shot S 56 A is lo, and this single-shot is triggered by the Q output of single-shot S 528 A at the time of the Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P As previously discussed, the single-shot S 56 A does not time out until 2 milliseconds after receipt of Pulse No 1 When the single-shot S 56 A times out its Q bar output goes hi, and the differentiator circuit 526 generates a positive pulse which is inverted by inverter 156 A and is formed as a lo XA Pulse at input 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A Thus, the XA Pulse at input 11 of NAND gate NA 31 A occurs 2 milliseconds after the Pulse No 1 in the signal X Count Pulse-P, and between the inhibited Pulses Nos 2 and 3 in the pulse 70 train X Count Pulse-P.

As previously noted, the single-shot S 528 B times out between the Pulses Nos.

3 and 4 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P.

Accordingly, the Q bar output of this single 75 shot goes hi at this time, and Pulse No 4 and subsequent pulses of the signal X Count Pulse-P are inverted and formed as lo pulses at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A In the specific example at hand, Pulses Nos 4 and 80 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P are formed as lo pulses at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A It will be seen below that the pulse train X Count Pulse-P is inhibited prior to receipt of Pulse No 6 85 Referring now to Fig 211, it will be recalled that if four or more pulses are coded in the X data word, resulting in a lo condition for the signal X Decode 4 Plus-N, the X counter CT 61 is incremented by one 90 count before the memory cycle is completed.

Accordingly, it will require one less pulse from the signal X Count Pulse-P in this case to obtain the hi signal X Carry-P In the specific example under discussion, where 95 the count in the X data word is 6, the inverted data loaded into X counter CT 61 was originally -6, but was incremented once to a count of -5 Thus, the X counter CT 61 will be counted to a full register condition 100 of all binary l's responsive to five pulses in the signal X Count Pulse-P, rather than the six counts which would normally be expected Accordingly, when Pulse No 5 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P has been 105 received, and the X counter CI 61 has been incremented by five counts, the hi condition for the signal X Carry-P is obtained, resulting in a lo condition for the signal X StopN and resetting of the X Run flip flop fi 21 B, 110 as previously described in connection with Fi- 21 d At this time, the signal X Run-N from the flip flop fi 21 B goes hi As shown in Fig 21 l, this signal then inhibits formation of further pulses in the pulse train X Count 115 Pulse-P, and the Pulse No 6 in this pulse train is never received Thus, referring back to Fig 21 k, the last pulse in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P inverted by NAND gate NA 5 A is Pulse No 5, and the last lo pulse 120 formed at input 10 of NAND gate NA 31 A corresponds to the Pulse No 5 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P.

However, when the X run flip flop #21 B is reset by the signal X Stop-N at the time 125 of the Pulse No 5 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P and the signal X Run-N goes hi, the differentiator circuit 512 generates a positive pulse at pin 10 of single-shot S 56 B. Since the signal Basic Home-P is lo at this 130 571,570,244 time, the signal at pin 9 of single-shot S 56 B is also lo Accordingly, the single-shot S 56 B is triggered by the positive pulse at its pin at the time of the Pulse No 5 in the signal X Count Pulse-P The single-shot S 56 B times out 1 8 milliseconds after being triggered, at a time after the Pulse No 6 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P would have been received if not inhibited When the Q bar output of the single-shot S 56 B goes hi, the differentiator circuit 532, generates a positive pulse at input 13 of NAND gate NA 5 C Since the signal Xb Pulse Inhibit-N is hi, a corresponding lo XB Pulse is formed at input 9 of NAND gate NA 31 A at a time 1 8 milliseconds after the Pulse No.

in the signal X Count Pulse-P.

Accordingly, the following positive pulses are formed at output 8 of NAND gate NA 31 A A first pulse corresponding to the Pulse No 1 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P, an XA Pulse 2 milliseconds later, i.e, during the time that the Pulses Nos 2 and 3 in the pulse train X Count Pulse-P are inhibited, the Pulses Nos 4 and 5 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P, and finally an XB Pulse 1 8 milliseconds after the Pulse No 5 of the pulse train X Count Pulse-P.

All of these pulses are formed as positive pulses at input 2 of single-shot S 568 A, and trigger this single-shot The single-shot regenerates the pulses, and forms them into widened lo pulses as the signal X ComboN for control of the X stepping motor.

As discussed above, when the single-shot S 56 B times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 532 generates a positive pulse which results in a lo XB Pulse at the output of NAND gate NASC As shown, this lo pulse is also formed at pin 9 of single-shot S 568 B It will be recalled that the signal Basic Home-N is hi at this time, as well as the signal Xc Pulse InhibitN, resulting in a hi signal at input 10 of single-shot S 568 B to enable the single-shot.

Accordingly, the lo pulse at pin 9 of singleshot S 568 B triggers the single-shot The single-shot is configured to undergo a 2 2 millisecond delay after being triggered When the single-shot times out and its Q bar output goes hi, differentiator circuit 534 generates a positive XC Pulse which is passed through OR gate 082 C to trigger the singleshot S 568 A at its pin 2 Accordingly, the pulse is regenerated by the single-shot, and a lo widened XC Pulse is formed into the signal X Combo-N for the X stepping motor at a time 2 2 milliseconds after formation of the XB Pulse At this time six pulses have been transmitted to the X stepping motor, and formation of the signal X Combo-N has been completed.

-In review, the pulse train X Combo-N for the X stepping motor has been formed as follows Assuming that N counts were programmed into the X data word and that N is greater than three, the pulses are formed for the X stepping motor with the following timing A first pulse is formed for the signal X Combo-N at the time of Pulse No 1 70 in the signal X Count Pulse-P The Pulses Nos 2 and 3 of the signal X Count Pulse-P are inhibited, and an XA Pulse is formed 2 milliseconds after the time of the first pulse.

Pulses in the signal X Combo-N are then 75 formed corresponding to the pulses in the signal X Count Pulse-P up to, and including, the Pulse No (N-1) in the signal X Count Pulse-P The next pulse formed in the signal X Combo-N is the Pulse XB 80 which occurs 1 8 milliseconds after Pulse No (N 1) in the pulse train X Count PulseP Finally, the last pulse in the pulse train X Combo-N is the XC Pulse which is formed 2.2 milliseconds after the XB Pulse Thus, it 85 has been shown how the pulse train X Count Pulse-P has been modified to form a ramped pulse train to the stepping motor.

It will be seen that formation of the signal Y Combo-N for control of the Y stepping 90 motor in the case of four or more counts in the Y control word is very similar to that discussed above When the Y run flip flop is set and its output Y Run-N goes lo, the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is initiated 95 Referring to Fig 21 k, Pulse No 1 in the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is inverted by NAND gate NA 29 A, and is utilised to form the first regenerated lo pulse in the signal Y Combo-N corresponding to the time of 100 the Pulse No 1 When the signal Y Run-P previously goes hi and the flip flop f 16 B is set, the single-shot S 540 A is triggered by Pulse No 1 in the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P, as previously described When the 105 single-shot S 540 A times out and its Q output goes lo, Pulses Nos 2 and 3 in the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P are inhibited by the NAND gate NA 29 A Also, as previously described, the Q output of single-shot S 540 B 110 resets flip flop f 16 B to inhibit single-shot S 540 A after receipt of the Pulse No 1 in the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P As discussed above, the triggered single-shot S 540 A is utilized to trigger the single-shot 115 S 530 A, since both signals LS Shift-N and YA Pulse Inhibit-N are hi resulting in a lo signal at pin 9 of this single-shot When the single-shot S 530 A times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 120 540 generates a positive pulse which results in formation of a lo YA Pulse at input 4 of NAND gate NA 31 B The corresponding pulse is regenerated by single-shot S 569 A and is formed as a lo widened YA Pulse in 125 the signal Y Combo-N 2 milliseconds after formation of the first pulse, and during the time that Pulses Nos 2 and 3 in the signal Y Count Pulse-P have been inhibited The Pulse No 4 and subsequent pulses in the 130 1,570,244 pulse train Y Count Pulse-P are utilized to form regenerated lo pulses in the signal Y Combo-N up to, and including, Pulse (N-1) which in this case is Pulse No 5.

As previously described in connection with Fig 21 j, since the lo signal Y Decode 4 Plus-N caused the Y counter CT 62 to be incremented by one count during the memory cycle, a hi condition for the signal Y Carry-P is obtained when the counter has been strobed (N-1) or 5 times by the inverted signal Y Count Pulse-P At this time, the signal Y Stop-N goes lo, and the Y run flip flop fi 32 B shown in Fig 21 d is reset with its output Y run-N reset hi Referring to Fig 21 l, the Nth or 6th pulse in the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P is inhibited as a result of the hi signal Y Run-N Referring back to Fig 21 k, the Nth or 6th pulse is not formed into the pulse train Y Combo-N However, when the signal Y Run-N of the Y run flip flop goes hi, a positive pulse is generated by the differentiator circuit 514 at pin 2 of single-shot S 530 B Since the signal Homing Mode-OP is lo at this time, the single-shot S 530 B is triggered by the pulse at its input 2 When the single-shot times out 1 8 milliseconds later, the differentiator circuit 542 generates a positive pulse at input 5 of NAND gate NA 29 D Since the signal Yb Pulse Inhibit-N is hi, a lo YB Pulse is formed at input 3 of NAND gate NA 31 B, resulting in a corresponding hi pulse at pin 10 of the single-shot S 569 A The triggered single-shot regenerates the pulse as a lo widened YB pulse in the signal Y Combo-N at a time 1.8 milliseconds after the Pulse No (N-1) or 5 in the pulse train Y Count Pulse-P.

It will be noted that the output of NAND gate NA 29 D is also connected to pin 1 of the single-shot S 569 B Since the signals Basic Home-N and Yc Pulse Inhibit-N are both hi, the signal at pin 2 of single-shot S 569 B is also hi Accordingly, the lo YB Pulse at pin 1 of single-shot S 569 B triggers the single-shot The single-shot S 569 B times out 2 2 milliseconds after being triggered.

When the single-shot S 569 B times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 542 generates a positive pulse which passes through OR gate 082 D to trigger single-shot S 569 A at its input 10 The singleshot S 569 A regenerates the pulse as a lo widened YC pulse in the signal Y ComboN for control of the Y stepping motor Accordingly, the pulse train Y Combo-N for the Y stepping motor has been formed in a similar fashion to that described in connection with the X circuitry.

Although, for convenience, formation of the pulse trains X Combo-N and Y ComboN have been described together for the same counts coded into the X and Y data words, it will be understood that control of the X and Y stepping motors is independent Accordingly, in the usual situation a different number of pulses will be coded in the X and Y data words, resulting in different pulse trains X Combo-N and Y Combo-N for the X and Y stepping motors It will be 70 recalled in connection with Fig 21 d that the X and Y run flip flops f J 21 B and ff 32 B are set at the same time by the signal Start RunN Accordingly, with reference to Fig 21 l, it will be seen that the pulse trains X Count 75 Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P will be initiated at the same time, since they are started by the X and Y run flip flop outputs, and since they are both formed from the signal LS Osc-N So long as one or more pulses 80 have been coded into the X and Y data words, the first pulse formed into the pulse trains X Combo-N and Y Combo-N will occur at the same time However, after this time, the pulse trains to the X and Y step 85 ping motors are dependent upon the number of counts coded in the respective X or Y data word, and may vary from each other.

It will be recalled in connection with Fig 25 that the last pulse transmitted to the step 90 ping motors will occur before the time T 9 when the needle enters the fabric.

The final condition discussed for the X and Y data words corresponds to zero counts in the data words With reference to 95 Figs 21 j and 33, since the X or Y data word is inverted as the Data-N signals, all of the Data-N signals will be hi and the X or Y counters CT 61 or CT 62, respectively, will be full when the data is loaded into 100 the counters Referring to Figs 21 d, 21 e, and 21 j, the corresponding signal X Stop-N or Y Stop-N will be lo due to the resulting hi condition for the corresponding signal X Carry-P or Y Carry-P from the full 105 counters For example, the signal X Stop-N is lo since the signal X Carry-P is hi When the lo pulse for the signal Start Run-N is received, the signal X Run-N will remain hi even though the lo pulse is formed at the 110 output of NOR gate NO 2 OA of Fig 21 d, which would normally set the X run flip flop f 121 B When the signal Start Run-N decays, the signal X Run-P will return to its lo condition Referring to Fig 21 j, since the signal 115 X Run-N remains hi, the signal X Count Pulse-P is inhibited and remains lo Thus,referring to Fig 21 k, since no pulses are formed in the signal X Count Pulse-P, no pulses are formed at input 10 of NAND gate 120 NA 31 A nor other inputs to this gate Although the signal X Run-P goes temporarily hi, and then returns to its lo state, resulting in setting of flip flop #16 A, the lack of a pulse in the signal X Count Pulse-P prevents the 125 single-shot S 528 A from being triggered.

Since the remaining pulses are dependent upon triggering of single-shot S 528 A or formation of pulses in the signal X Count Pulse-P, no pulses are formed in the signal 130 1,570,244 60 X Combo-N to the X stepping motor, and the clamps will not be moved in the X direction It will be appreciated that the same result occurs for the Y stepping motor due to the fact that the Y Carry-P signal is hi before the Stitch Mode is entered Of course, if both the X and Y data words are coded with zero counts, the clamps would not be moved in the X or Y directions Accordingly, only one of the two X or Y control words would normally ever be coded with zero counts For example, it may be desired to drive the Y stepping motor 5 pulses, while the X stepping motor remains at rest, in which case zero counts are programmed into the X control word and 5 counts are coded into the Y control word, such that only the Y stepping motor is moved.

For convenience of discussion at this time, it is noted that the control of the X and Y stepping motors corresponding to the X and Y data words for movement of the clamps relative to the needle is substantially the same irrespective of whether the program is in the Stitch Mode Stop Stitch Mode or the Slow Stitch Mode In each case, the X and Y data words are decoded to form the X Combo-N and Y Combo-N signals for control of the X and Y stepping motors according to the discussion above.

When both of the X and Y run flip flops of Fig 21 d have been reset, both inputs 8 and 9 of NOR gate N 020 C are reset lo.

Thus, at the time of the last of the two signals X Stop-N and Y Stop-N to go lct the output of NOR gate N 020 C goes from a lo to a hi condition, and the differentiator circuit 550 generates a positive pulse at the input of inverter 119 D The inverter 119 D inverts the positive pulse, and forms a lo pulse at input 3 of OR gate 08 C It will be recalled that the flip flop fl 21 A was reset by the signal Homing Clear-N, and that the signal Basic Home-P is lo at this time Since the condition at input 3 of OR gate 08 C is hi until the lo pulse is received at this input, a lo pulse is formed at input 1 of NAND gate N Al IB, and a hi pulse is fonned at its output which triggers single-shot S 522 B at its input 10.

The single-shot S 522 B undergoes a 5 millisecond delay, which occurs during the time period delta T 4, between times T 8 and T 2, as discussed in connection with Fig 25.

When the single-shot times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 578 generates a positive pulse which is inverted by gate N A 11 C as a low pulse at input 11 of NOR gate N 034 B, since the signal NTB Mode-OP is normally hi Also, the signal Clamp Mode-OP was set lo prior to the homing mode, and the lo pulse is inverted as a positive pulse at input 1 of NOR gate N 0135 A As previously discussed, the signal Aux Start-P is normally lo, and the NOR gate N 0135 A inverts the positive pulse, the inverter I 131 B inverts the corresponding lo pulse again to form a positive pulse at input 6 of flip flop ff 34 A, which sets the memory cycle flip flop It will be 70 recalled that this flip flop was reset by the pulse EMC-P during the previous memory cycle Accordingly, the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P is again set hi, and the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N is set lo to initiate another 75 memory cycle at time T 2 of the timing cycle shown in Fig 25 Thus, referring to Fig 21 c, when the signal Mem Cycle Enable-N goes lo, the signal Clock Pulse is again formed from the H S Clock signal for use during 80 the memory cycle Also, as discussed in connection with Fig 21 i, it will be recalled that the signal Mem Cycle Enable-P results in the resetting of the pulse inhibit flip flops on chips 598 to 604 85 It will be seen in connection with the timing cycle shown in Fig 25 how the control system sequences through the program in the PROM After the completion of the homing mode, the first 5 millisecond delay under 90 gone by the single-shot S 522 B of Fig 21 d took place during the time period delta T 4.

After the delay was completed, the memory cycle flip flop f J 34 A of Fig 21 d was set at time T 2 to initiate the first memory cycle 95 During the memory cycle, the Y data word was first read from the memory of the PROM, was inverted as the Data-N signals, and was decoded Next, the X data word was read from the PROM, was inverted as the 100 Data-N signals, and was decoded The control word was read from the PROM, was inverted as the Data-N signals, and was decoded, and the memory cycle then ended at time T 3 In addition, the address registers 105 were incremented three times during the memory cycle At this time, the control system was prepared for initiating movement of the clamps by the X and Y stepping motors However, this procedure does not 110 take place until time T 4 when the Needle Disengage Sensor causes a positive pulse to be formed as the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P, indicating that the sewing machine is sufficiently advanced in the timing cycle 115 to permit movement of the clamps As previously discussed, the signals to the stepping motors may be started before the needle has been actually removed from the fabric, due to the lag time associated with 120 the stepping motors and inertia of the clamps At time T 5 the needle has been removed from the fabric, and actual movement of the clamps is started at time T 6 in response to the signals sent to the X and Y 125 stepping motors Movement of the clamps has been completed at time T 8, which is some time prior to the time T 9 when the needle again enters the fabric Next, the 5 millisecond delay is undertaken by the single 130 1,570,244 1,570,244 shot S 522 B of Fig 21 d during the time delta T 4, after which a subsequent memory cycle is again started at time T 2 In this manner, the control system sequences through the program, particularly in the Stitch Mode.

Next, it is assumed that a Slow Stitch Command has been received from one of the control words As previously noted, a series of Slow Stitch Commands are normally used before a Stop Stitch Command or End of Program Command, in order to slow the sewing machine in preparation for these commands As shown in Fig 211 the pulse Slow Stitch-P results in formation of a lo pulse at input 13 of NAND gate NA 70 A, and the positive pulse formed at the output of this gate resets the flip flop #84 A Thus the signal Stitch Mode-P is set lo to remove the system from the Stitch Mode Also, output 1 of this flip flop is set hi, resulting in a hi signal at input 1 of driver circuit DC 72 A It will be recalled that if either input to the driver circuit DC 72 A is hi, the resulting output of the driver circuit is hi, and the main clutch/brake solenoid is deenergized It will be recalled in connection with Fig 17 that the disc 430 will be engaged against the main brake surface 434 of worm wheel 432 at this time.

As shown in Fig 21 g, the pulse Slow Stitch-P is inverted by inverter 152 F to set flip flop #54 C with its output 3 lo, and with its output 6 hi Accordingly, input 8 of OR gate 053 C is lo, and if the Normal/Service Select Switch is at its Normal terminak the other input of OR gate 053 C is also lo, resulting in a lo signal at input 1 of driver circuit DC 88 B It will be recalled that if either input of driver circuit DC 88 B is lo, the output signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is also lo As discussed, this condition of the signal prevents the Quick device from starting the cutting and stopping sequence of the machine even when the Quick device determines from the signals of the unit 62 that the machine is being operated at slow speed Accordingly, the disc 446 of Fig 17 remains engaged against the auxiliary clutch surface 448, and a sequence of Slow Speed Commands may be used to slow the machine from fast to slow speed during the Slow Stitch Mode.

Referring to Fig 21 g, the signal Flow Stitch Mode-1 P is set hi by flip flop fi 54 C to indicate that the system is in the Slow Stitch Mode The delayed signal at input 5 of AND gate A 42 A is also hi to condition this gate for a subsequent Stop Stitch Command, if any It will be recalled that input 4 of AND gate A 42 A is lo, since the flip flop f J 39 B was reset with its output 1 lo by the pulse Stitch-P during the Stitch Modes, which preceded the Slow Stitch Mode The pulse Slow Stitch-P also sets flip flop #57 A with its output STCH-1 P set hi, and with its output STCH-OP set lo It will be recalled the flip flop f#57 A is reset by the signal X Strobe-N during the memory cycle.

Referring to Fig 21 g, since the output of 70 the set flip flop fi 57 A to input 9 of NOR gate N 044 B is lo, it will be seen that a lo pulse is formed for the signal Start Run-N to again initiate formation of the pulse trains to X and Y stepping motors Thus, with 75 reference to Fig 21 d, the lo pulse Start RunN causes the X and Y run flip flops f 121 B and fj 32 B, respectively, to be set, and the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P (Fig 21 j) are initiated As pre 80 viously described, each of the pulses in the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P result in counting of the X and Y counters CT 61 and CT 62, respectively, and, as described in connection with Fig 21 k, 85 the signals X Combo-N and Y Combo-N for control of the X and Y stepping motors are formed from the pulse trains X Count Pulse-P and Y Count Pulse-P, and from the decoded X and Y control words, as des 90 cribed above in connection with the Stitch Mode However, at this time the sewing needle is being reciprocated at the slow speed When the X and Y run flip flops of Fig 21 d are reset after completion of clamp 95 movement, the differentiator circuit 550 again generates a positive pulse, resulting in triggering of the single-shot S 522 B After a millisecond delay, the memory cycle flip flop f#34 A is again set to initiate a new 100 memory cycle.

It will be recalled that during normal operation of the sewing machine, the Needle Disengage Pulse-P signal is utilized to initiate formation of the pulse trains to the step 105 ping motors for moving the clamps in the X and Y directions However, the needle is not reciprocating during the Stop Stitch Mode, and the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P will not be generated in this mode 110 Accordingly, a new reference is needed during the Stop Stitch Mode to sequence the system through its operation.

As shown in Fig 21 g, the positive pulse EMC-P formed at the end of each memory 115 cycle triggers the single-shot S 518 A at its pin 2 The single-shot S 518 A undergoes a 7 millsecond delay, and when it times out its Q bar output goes hi At this time, the diflerentiator circuit 616 generates a positive 120 pulse at input 2 of NAND gate NA 55 B, which is utilized to form a lo pulse as the signal Start Run-N and set the X and Y run flip flops for initiating the pulse trains to the stepping motors Assuming that more 125 than one consecutive Stop Stitch Command has been programmed in the PROM, the signal EMC-P is utilized to sequence each timing cycle, in lieu of the signal Needle 1,570,244 Disengage Pulse-P, after the first such timing cyclo, as will be seen below.

The timing cycle during the Stop Stitch Mode, after the first timing cycle, is illustrated in Fig 39 At time Ti the pulse EMC-P at the end of the memory cycle goes hi and the single-shot S 518 A of Fig 21 g is triggered, resulting in the 7 millisecond delay which ends at time T 2 On the second and subsequent timing cycles in the Stop Stitch Mode, the pulse generated responsive to timing out of the single-shot S 518 A causes the X and Y run flip flops to be set, resulting in formation of the pulse trains to the X and Y stepping motors which ends at time T 3 Of course, the time interval between the times T 2 and T 3, during which the clamps are being moved by the stepping motors, is dependent upon the number of pulses output to the stepping motors in the X and Y directions Accordingly, this variable time period will be dependent upon the number of counts in the X and Y control words When the motor pulse trains have been formed, and the X and Y run flip flops have been reset, the single-shot S 522 B of Fig 21 d will be triggered, resulting in a 5 millisecond delay which ends at the time T 4 At this time, the next memory cycle is initiated, and, when completed, the pulse EMC-P again triggers single-shot S 518 A of Fig 21 g at time TI.

Thus, on the second and subsequent timing cycles in the Stop Stitch Mode, the system is sequenced through the program by the signal EMC-P at the end of each memory cycle It should be noted that during the Stitch Mode and Slow Stitch Mode the flip flop 2 J 57 A of Fig 21 g has been set by the signals Stitch-P or Slow Stitch-P, respectively, resulting in a lo signal at input 1 of NAND gate NA 55 B Accordingly, although the positive pulse will be generated by the differentiator circuit 616 during the Stitch and Slow Stitch Modes, the pulse is not generated until input 1 of NAND gate NA 55 B has been conditioned lo, due to the 7 millisecond delay associated with singleshot S 518 A, thus preventing the delayed positive pulse at input 2 of this gate from setting the signal Start Run-N lo Accordingly, the flip flop 2 157 A inhibits the gate NA 55 B during the Stitch and Slow Stitch Modes However, the flip flop f#57 A is reset by the signal X Strobe-N during each memory cycle, and the gate NA 55 B will be enabled with a hi signal at its input 1 during the Stop Stitch Mode.

It will be recalled that cutting of the thread is initiated in the Stop Stitch Mode, and it is desired that completion of this oeion take place before movement of the ps in this mode Accordingly, the pulse erated by differentiator circuit 616 respoosve to triggering of the single-shot S 518 A will be inhibited during the first timing cycle of the Stop Stitch Mode to prevent premature starting of the X and Y stepping motors, since the 7 millisecond delay may not be sufficient before the thread has been 70 cut.

The time at which the thread has been cut is determined by the circuitry shown in Fig 21 h When the thread is cut, the End of Cut signal goes lo, thus triggering single 75 shot S 518 B When the single-shot times out its Q bar output goes hi, and the differentiator circuit 618 generates a positive pulse which passes through AND gate A 32 C as the pulse End of Cut Pulse-P It will be re 80 called that the signal End of Program ModeIP is lo at this time, thus preventing passage of the pulse though NAND gate NA 31 C.

Referring to Fig 211, it will be recalled 85 that the stitch flip flop f#84 A was reset during the Slow Stitch Mode, such that the main brake/clutch solenoid remains deenergized during the Stop Stitch Mode.

Thus, the disc 430 of the Quick device, 90 shown in Fig 17, remains against the main brake surface 434 Referring to Fig 21 g, since the signal End of Program-P is lo at this time, the positive pulse Stop Stitch-P is inverted by NOR gate NO 53 B, and a lo 95 pulse is formed at input 12 of NAND gate NA 54 B Since the signal NTB Mode PulseN is normally hi, the lo pulse is inverted by NAND gate NA 54 B, and a positive pulse is formed at input 11 of NOR gate N 053 A 100 Since the signal Stitch-P is lo at this time, the pulse is inverted by NOR gate NO 53 A, and a lo pulse is formed at input 1 of flip flop f 154 C to reset the flip flop and clear out the Slow Stitch Mode Accordingly, out 105 put 3 of flip flop 54 C is set hi, which is the same condition of the flip flop discussed in connection with the Stitch Mode In this case, assuming that the Normal/Service Select Switch has been set at its Normal 110 terminal, both inputs of driver circuit DC 88 B are hi, and the circuit output signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is also hi.

At this time, the machine should be operating at its slow speed, since a sequence of 115 Slow Sew Commands have been used during the Slow Stitch Mode to slow the machine.

As previously discussed, the Quick device monitors the signals from the unit 62 to determine whether the machine is operating at 120 slow speed During the Slow Stitch Mode, the Quick device is prevented from starting the cutting and stopping sequence due to the lo signal output from driver circuit DC 88 B However, during the Stop Stitch 125 Mode this signal is hi, and the Quick device is permitted to start this sequence as soon as it determines the machine is operating at slow speed As previously discussed, this should occur at the start of the Stop 130 63 1,570,244 63 Stitch Mode Thus, the Quick device initiates the cutting device, and engages the disc 446 against the auxiliary brake surface 450 to stop reciprocation of the needle with the needle in its up position When the pulse End of Cut Pulse-P is received, indicating that the thread has been cut, the clamps may be moved without obstruction by the needle.

Referring now to Fig 21 g, when the positive pulse Stop Stitch-P is received, the flip flop f J 39 B is set with its output 1 set hi.

Accordingly, the signal Stop Stitch Mode1 P and input 4 of AND gate A 42 A are set hi The flip flop f 154 C is reset with its output 6 set lo, which is delayed to input 5 of AND gate A 42 A by delay circuit 620 It will be recalled that in the Slow Stitch Mode input of AND gate A 42 A was set hi, and, accordingly, since input 4 of this gate is set hi, there will be a short period of time during which both inputs of the gate are hi Thus, the output of AND gate A 42 A will be momentarily hi to set flip flop ff 57 B, after which the delayed signal at input 5 of AND gate A 42 A goes lo, resulting in a lo signal at input 8 of flip flop f 157 B Accordingly, output of flip flop ft 57 B is set lo at this time, resulting in a lo condition at input 13 of NAND gate NA 55 B, which will occur before the single-shot S 518 A times out, and before the pulse is generated by differentiator circuit 616 The lo signal at input 3 of NAND gate NA 55 B prevents passage of the pulse generated by differentiator circuit 616 through the NAND gate NA 55 B during the first timing cycle of the Stop Stitch Mode.

Accordingly, during the first timing cycle, the pulse EMC-P is not utilized to initiate formation of the pulse trains to the X and Y stepping motors.

When the thread has been cut, and the positive pulse End of Cut Pulse-P is received, the flip flop ff 57 B is reset by this signal to enable gate NA 55 B during subsequent timing cycle The positive pulse is also formed at input 12 of AND gate A 42 C.

Since output 1 of flip flop ff 39 B has been set hi, the positive pulse is passed through the gate to input 12 of NOR gate N 044 A.

It will be seen that input 11 of NOR gate N 044 A is lo at this time Since the signal Basic Home-N is hi, input 9 of NAND gate NA 55 A is also hi Also, the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P is lo, resulting in a hi condition at input 10 of NAND gate NA 55 A Since the time has passed for the pulse from circuit 616, input 2 of NAND gate NA 55 B is lo, and input 11 of OR gate 043 D will be hi at this time, resulting in a hi condition at input 11 of NAND gate NA 55 A and a lo signal at input 11 of NOR gate N 044 A Accordingly, the NOR gate N 044 A inverts the positive pulse at its input 12, and forms a lo pulse for the signal Start Run-N.

As previously discussed, the lo pulse Start Run-N sets the X and Y run flip flops, and initiates formation of the pulse trains to the X and Y stepping motors After movement of the clamps has been completed, the 70 differentiator circuit 550 of Fig 21 d generates a positive pulse, resulting in setting of flip flop ff 34 A, and initiation of another memory cycle Assuming that a second consecutive Stop Stitch Command has been 75 utilized in a control word, when the pulse EMC-P triggers the single-shot S 518 A (Fig.

21 g) and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 616 generates a positive pulse at input 2 of NAND gate NA 55 B It 80 will be recalled that the flip flop f 157 B has been reset by the signal End of Cut Pulse-P, resulting in a hi signal at input 13 of NAND gate NA 55 B Also, since the flip flop f 157 A has been reset by the signal X Strobe-N, the 85 signal at input 1 of NAND gate NA 55 B will also be hi Accordingly, the positive pulse formed at input 2 of NAND gate NA 55 B is inverted, and a corresponding lo pulse is formed at input 11 of OR gate 043 D Since 90 the other input of this gate is lo, and since input 11 of OR gate 043 D was previously hi, the lo pulse is passed through the gate and is formed as a lo pulse at input 11 of NAND gate NASSA The lo pulse is in 95 verted by gate NASSA, and a positive pulse is formed at input 11 of NOR gate N 044 A, since inputs 9 and 10 of NAND gate NASSA remain hi Since the pulse End of Cut PulseP has decayed prior to this time, input 12 100 of AND gate A 42 C will be lo, resulting in a lo signal at input 12 of NOR gate N 044 A.

Accordingly, the positive pulse at input 11 of NOR gate N 044 A is inverted, and a lo pulse is formed as the signal Start Run-N, 105 which sets the X and Y run flip flops to initiate formation of the pulse trains to the X and Y stepping motors and movement of the clamps in the X and Y directions Again, when movement of the clamps has been com 110 pleted, and the X and Y run flip flops have both been reset, the single-shot S 522 B of Fig 21 d is triggered, resulting in a 5 millisecond delay, and then initiation of another memory cycle If another Stop Stitch Com 115 mand has been coded into the next control word, the positive pulse EMC-P, at the end of the memory cycle, is utilized to trigger the single-shot S 518 A, and start another operation of the X and Y stepping motors 120 in the Stop Stitch Mode.

As previously discussed the last command which is given in a programming sequence in the PROM is the End of Program Command Also, it will be recalled that a se 125 quence of Slow Stitch Commands are given before coding this command to slow the sewing machine in the Slow Stitch Mode for the final command It was also discussed above that the End of Program Command 130 1,570,244 1,570,244 results in stopping of the machine, cutting of the thread, and automatic entry into the homing mode to reposition the clamps relative the needle at the home position after the thread has been cut.

Referring to Fig 21 g, when the positive pulse End of Program-P is received, the flip flop #39 A is set with its output 10 set lo, and with the signal End of Program ModeIP set hi The lo signal at output 10 of flip flop f#39 A passes through delay circuit 512 to input 10 of NAND gate NA 54 A, resulting in a hi condition for the signal Address Clear-P It is noted that the signal Start Pulse-N is hi at this time Accordingly, the hi signal Address Clear-P clears the registers ARI and AR 2 of Fig 21 ca, and resets flip flop #130 A in preparation for another program.

The hi signal End of Program Mode-l P is connected to OR gate 043 D, as shown in Fig 21 g, such that input 11 of NAND gate NA 55 A will remain hi when a pulse is generated at the time the triggered singleshot S 518 A times out, thus preventing formation of a lo pulse for the signal Start Run-N and initiation of clamp movement.

Referring to Fig 211, the pulse End of Program-P causes the stitch flip flop f#84 A to be reset through gates N 044 C and NA 70 A to assure that the main brake/clutch solenoid is deenerized, although the stitch flip flop had been reset during the Slow Stitch Mode Turning to Fig 21 g, the pulse End of Program-P connected to input 5 of NOR gate N 053 B resets the slow stitch flip flop f 154 C with its output 3 set hi, and with its output 6 set lo, in order to clear out the Slow Stitch Mode Assuming that the Normal/Service Select Switch is at its Normal terminal, both input signals to driver circuit DC 88 B are hi, and the signal Quick Slow Sew Cmd is therefore hi Since the machine has been slowed to its slow speed during the Slow Stitch Mode, the Quick device initiates the cutting device and stops reciprocation of the sewing needle by causing engagement of its auxiliary brake, as previously described in connection with the Stop Stitch Mode.

Referring now to Fig 21 h, when the thread has been cut and the End of Cut Signal goes lh, the single-shot S 518 B is triggered When the single-shot times out and its Q bar output goes hi, differentiator circuit 618 generates a positive pulse which is passed through AND gate A 32 C as a positive pulse for the signal End of Cut Pulse-P, which is connected to input 1 of NAND gate NA 31 C It will be recalled that the signal End of Prog Mode-1 P is hi at this time, and the normal condition for the signal NTB Mode-OP is hi Accordingly, the positive pulse End of Cut Pulse-P is inverted by NAND gate NA 31 C, and a lo pulse is formed as the signal End of Final Cut-N.

As shown in Fig 21 J, the lo pulse End of Final Cut-N is inverted by inverter 191 D, and on the leading edge of the positive pulse thus formed, the differentiator circuit 622 generates a positive pulse which resets flip 70 flop fi 9 OA The flip flop is set with its output 1 or the signal Clamp Mode-l P set lo, and with its output 4 or the signal Clamp Mode-Op set hi The lo signals at input 8 of NOR gate NO 9 OB and input 11 of NOR 75 gate NO 9 OC result in the outputs of these gates going hi, and cause the driver circuits DC 89 A and DC 89 B to release the fabric and label clamps Accordingly, the clamps are raised during the final homing mode, as will 80 be described below.

Referring back to Fig 21 h, it will be recalled that the signal Start Pulse-N is hi at this time Accordingly the lo pulse formed at input 4 of NAND gate NA 32 A is inverted 85 by the gate, and a positive pulse is formed as the signal Homing Set-P The hi pulse is inverted again by inverter 119 A, and a lo pulse is formed as the signal Homing Set-N.

The signals Homing Set-N and Homing Set 90 P are utilized to initiate the start of the final homing mode, as previously described Thus, referring to Fig 21 d, the signal Homing SetN sets the flip flop j J 21 A with its output signals Basic Home-P hi and Basic Home-N 95 lo, and the basic homing mode is entered at this time The homing mode will proceed through the basic home mode, the auxiliary homing mode, and possibly the sub-auxiliary homing mode if the final approach by the 100 stepping motors did not take place in the specified direction.

When the homing mode is completed and the clamps have been raised, the operator may remove the fabric which has been sewn 105 according to the program selected in the PROM The operator may insert a new piece of fabric below the fabric clamp and initiate the start of a new homing mode and a new program by depressing the pedals, as 110 previously described.

The operation of the circuitry associated with the Thread Break Sensor is discussed in connection with Fig 21 o During initialization, the flip flops ft 124 A, f J 125 A, and 115 ff 125 B are reset by the signal Reset-N Accordingly, the flip flop ff 125 A is reset with its output signal NTB Mode-OP reset hi, which is the normal condition for this signal.

Also, the reset flip flop f 1 J 24 A results in a 120 lo signal at input 10 of AND gate A 124 C, and thus a lo signal at input 12 of flip flop ff 125 A Finally, initialization of the flip flop tj 125 B causes a lo signal to be formed at input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D 125 Referring to Fig 21 m, if the NTB Override Switch is selected at its Override terminal, a lo condition is established for the signal NTB Override, and, as may be seen in Fig 21 o, the signals at inputrlO of AND 130 1,570,244 gate A 124 C and input 12 of flip flop #i 125 A remain lo during operation of the system with the NTB Override Switch in this setting Accordingly, the signal NTB Mode-OP remains in its normal hi condition during this time, and the Thread Break Sensor will not cause a fault condition to the system.

However, if the NTB Override Switch ispositioned at its Automatic terminal, the signal NTB Override is disconnected from ground, and the corresponding signal at input 10 of AND gate A 124 C is permitted to assume a hi state It will be recalled that during initialization input 10 of AND gate A 124 C was reset lo by the flip flop #i 124 A.

As will be seen below, the flip flop #f 124 A is not set until after the Stitch Mode is entered, and, accordingly, the signal NTB Mode-OP is not permitted to assume a lo fault condition until that time.

As discussed above, the signal Stitch Mode-P from the Stitch flip flop #f 84 A of Fig 211 is at a lo state until the Stitch Mode is entered The lo signal Stitch Mode-P is inverted by inverter I 127 A, and a hi signal is thus formed at the RST input of the counter CT 126 C The counter CT 126 C comprises a count-to-four counter similar to the counters CT 58 and CT 87 described in connection with Fig 21 e Thus, the hi signal at the RST input of the counter CT 126 C of Fig 21 o clears the counter, and prevents it from counting at this time As shown, the positive pulses Needle Disengage Pulse-P are inverted by inverter 1127 B and corresponding lo pulses are formed at the CLK input of counter CT 126 C However, since the RST input of the counter is hi before the Stitch Mode is entered, the lo pulses formed at the CLK input of the counter have no effect upon the counter at this time.

When the Stitch Mode is entered by the system, the signal Stitch Mode-P goes hi, as previously discussed, and a lo signal is formed during the Stitch Mode at the RST input of the counter CT 126 C Accordingly, the counter is enabled, and each of the lo pulses formed at the CLK input of the counter responsive to the positive pulses Needle Disengage Pulse-P cause the counter to be incremented one time When four Needle Disengage Pulse-P pulses have been received, the counter has been incremented four times, and the QD output of the counter goes hi at this time In response, the differentiator circuit 950 generates a positive pulse which sets flip flop if 125 B with its output signal at input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D being set in a hi condition As will be described below, the hi signal at input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D enables the circuitry to monitor the Thread Break Sensor for a possible thread break Accordingly, the circuitry does not operate during the first four stitches in the Stitch Mode, in the event that the Thread Break Sensor may possibly provide a false indication of thread break when the Stitch Mode is first entered and the thread is first used for stitching.

After the counter CT 126 C has been in 70 cremented four times and the flip flop fi 125 B has been set, the first positive pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P triggers the single-shot S 5126 A at its pin 10, since the signal at pin 9 of the single-shot was pre 75 viously reset lo by the initialized flip flop 2 i 124 A The triggered single-shot S 5126 A then undergoes a 1 millisecond delay When the single-shot times out and its Q bar output goes hi, the differentiator circuit 952 80 generates a positive pulse Since input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D is hi at this time, the positive pulse is inverted by the NAND gate, and a corresponding lo pulse is formed at input 4 of flip flop if 124 A which sets the 85 flip flop with its output signal at input 10 of AND gate A 124 C being set hi (Although the single-shot S 5126 A was triggered by previous pulses Needle Disengage Pulse-P, the previous lo signal at input 2 of NAND gate 90 NA 124 D prevented passage of the corresponding pulses from differentiator circuit 952 to the flip flop if 124 A) Since the flip flop if 124 A is not set until 1 millisecond after receipt of the pulse Needle Disengage 95 Pulse-P, the pulse Needle Disengage PulseP has decayed by this time, and the signal at input 9 of AND gate A 124 C assumes a lo condition before the flip flop if 124 A has been set, resulting in a continuous lo signal 100 at input 12 of flip flop if 125 A However, the set flip flop #f 124 A conditions the AND gate A 124 C for the next pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P by the delayed hi signal at input 10 of this gate 105 After the flip flop #if 124 A has been set, and before the next pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P has been received, the Thread Break Sensor measures the thread for tension to determine whether the thread has broken 110 If the Thread Break Sensor determines that tension remains on the thread, indicating that the thread has not broken, the resulting signal Thread Break Sensor formed at the (-) input of comparator CA 126 B tem 115 porarily exceeds the reference signal at the (+) input of the comparator formed from the + 9 volt power source In this case, a lo signal is temporarily formed at input 13 of flip flop 7 f 124 A which resets the flip flop, 120 resulting in a lo signal at input 10 of AND gate A 124 C Thus, when the thread has not broken, the flip flop is reset, and the AND gate A 124 C is inhibited by the resulting lo signal at its input 10 to prevent pas 125 sage of the next positive pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P to the flip flop if 125 A.

However, if the Thread Break Sensor does not measure tension on the thread, indicating that the thread has broken, the sig 130 66 1,570,244 66 nal at the (-) input of comparator CA 126 B remains at a lower condition than the reference signal at the (+) input of the comparator, and the output signal of the comparator at input 13 of flip flop #f 124 A remains in a hi condition Thus, the flip flop 8 f 124 A is not reset in this case, and the output signal of the flip flop at input 10 of AND gate A 124 C remains in a hi state Accordingly, when the next positive pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P is received, the pulse is passed through the conditioned gate A 124 C and sets the flip flop #f 125 A with its output signal NTB Mode-OP being set lo, indicating to the control system that the thread on the machine has broken Once the thread has been fixed, the signal Thread Break Sensor then causes the flip flop 2124 A to be reset, and the next pulse Needle Disengage PulseP triggers the single-shot S 5126 A, such that the resulting pulse formed by differentiator circuit 592 resets the flip flop #i 125 A with its output signal NTB Mode-OP being set in its normal hi condition.

In review, after four stitches in the Stitch Mode, the flip flop #124 A is set approximately 1 millisecond after receipt of the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P The flip flop is reset before receipt of the next pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P if the thread has not broken, and the signal NTB Mode-OP remains hi in this case However, if the thread has broken on the machine, the flip flop if 124 A is not reset, and the next pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P causes the flip flop #f 125 A to be set and the signal NTB Mode-OP to go lo, thus indicating that the thread has broken.

When the system enters another mode, such as the Slow Stitch Mode, the signal Stitch Mode-P returns to its lo condition, resulting in a hi signal at the RST input of counter CT 126 C, which clears and holds the counter Also, since the signal at the output of inverter 1127 A goes from a lo to hi condition at this time, differentiator circuit 954 generates a positive pulse which resets flip flop if 125 B with its output signal at input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D being set lo.

Accordingly, the circuitry is then inhibited from indicating a thread break until the Stitch Mode is again entered, since the lo condition at input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D prevents the flip flop f# 124 A from being set It is noted that the flip flop if 125 B has been reset for entry into another Stitch Mode as described above in connection with initialization of the circuit Thus, if the Stitch Mode is again entered, the counter CI 126 C is enabled at its RST input, and when four pulses from the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P have been received, the U-p #p ff 125 B is set with its output signal at input 2 of NAND gate NA 124 D being set hi to again enable the circuitry for indicat 65 ing a break in thread.

If the Thread Break Sensor detects a break in thread, the control system operates as follows In the event of a thread break the normally hi signal NTB Mode-OP goes lo, 70 as discussed above, resulting in a hi condition for the signal NTB Mode-P, as shown in Fig 21 h, immediately after a positive pulse is formed for the signal Needle Disengage Pulse-P As shown in Fig 21 t, when 75 the signal NTB Mode-P goes hi, differentiator circuit 610 generates a positive pulse which is inverted by inverter 183 C to form a lo pulse for the signal NTB Mode PulseN As previously discussed, the lo pulse is 80 inverted by NAND gate NA 70 A to reset flip flop #i 84 A and clear out the Stitch Mode In turn, the main brake/clutch solenoid is deenergized to slow the machine.

If the system was in the Stitch Mode, the 85 output of driver circuit DC 88 B of Fig 21 g is hi, and the Quick device will automatically stop reciprocation of the needle when it determines from unit 62 that the machine has been slowed to slow speed The signal 90 NTB Mode-OP establishes a lo condition at the following gates: (a) input 2 of NOR gate N 044 D of Fig 211; (b) input 2 of NAND gate NA 78 B of Fig 21 f; and (c) input 5 of NAND gate N A 11 C of Fig 21 d As illus 95 trated in Fig 21 g, the lo pulse NTB Mode Pulse-N at input 13 of NAND gate NA 54 B results in formation of a lo pulse at input 1 of flip flop if 54 C to reset the flip flop and clear out the Slow Stitch Mode, if any, and 100 thus permit the Quick device to stop the machine Finally, as shown in Fig 21 g, the hi signal NTB Mode-P is formed at an input of NOR gate N 044 B. Since the signals resulting from a thread 105 break are not formed until immediately after the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P, it will be apparent that all the conditions have been established for driving the X and Y stepping motors and the clamps Ac 110 cordingly, with reference to Fig 21 g, when the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P is received, a lo pulse is formed for the signal Start Run-N, the X and Y run flip flops are set, the pulse trains are formed for the X 115 and Y stepping motors to move the clamps.

When clamp movement has been completed, and the X and Y run flip flops have been reset, the differentiator circuit 550 of Fig.

21 d generates a positive pulse resulting in 120 triggering of the single-shot S 522 B When this single-shot times out, differentiator circuit 578 generates a positive pulse, as before, but passage of the pulse to the memory cycle flip flop 2 f 34 A is prevented by the lo 125 signal NTB Mode-OP at input 5 of NAND gate N Al C Thus, when the thread breaks, the clamps are moved according to the information in the last data read from the 1,570,244 1,570,244 PROM, but a new memory cycle is not entered Meanwhile, reciprocation of the needle is stopped With reference to Fig.

21 h, it is noted that the lo signal NTB Mode-OP will inhibit formation of the lo pulse End of Final Cut-N, and will prevent the clamps from being raised.

After the thread has been fixed by the operator, she may continue sewing in a few different mainers If desired, she may push the Reset Switch, as shown in Fig.

21 b, to cause the signal Reset-N to go lo, and reinitialize the circuits of the control system, as previously described An override switch is provided for the operator to prevent the clamps from being raised, in the event that she wishes to retrace the sewing pattern on the current fabric Accordingly, after the Reset Switch has been closed, the control system will enter the homing mode, as discussed above At the end of the homing mode, the control system will sequence into the program and start sewing anew, in a manner as previously described.

Alternatively, the operator may continue the program at the point where it had been interrupted responsive to a break in thread.

After the thread has been fixed, she may push the second foot pedal again to start the program where it has been stopped Referring to Fig 21 f, when the Pedal Go Switch has been actuated, a lo pulse is formed for the signal Cond Go-P Since the signal NTB Mode-OP is lo at this time, the corresponding pulse is blocked by NAND gate NA 78 B to prevent formation of the pulses Start Pulse-N and Start Pulse-P.

Referring to Fig 211, the lo pulse Cond Go-P will be passed through and inverted as a positive pulse at input 2 of AND gate A 70 D, since the signal NTB Mode-OP is lo at this time If the system was in the End of Program Mode when the thread broke, the program was completed, and the signal End of Prog Mode-l P was set hi In this case, the signal is inverted by inverter I 115 A, and the resulting lo signal at input 1 of AND gate A 70 D prevents formation of a pulse Aux Start-P Otherwise, the signal at input 1 of AND gate A 70 D is hi, and a positive pulse is formed for the signal Aux Start-P It will be recalled that if the system was in the Stitch or Slow Stitch Mode the signal STCH-1 P is hi, and, in this case, the gate NA 70 C is conditioned by this signal, in order that the pulse from gate N 044 D sets the flip flop #84 A, energizes the main brake/clutch solenoid and starts reciprocation of the needle Of course, if the system was in the Slow Stitch Mode, this solenoid will be deenergized when the next command is decoded to again stop the machine.

As shown in Fig 21 d, the positive pulse Aux Start-P, which is connected to NOR gate NO 135 A, results in a positive pulse being formed at input 6 of the memory cycle flip flop f#34 A, thus setting the flip flop to start the next memory cycle and read the next three words from the PROM As discussed above in connection with Fig 21 o, 70 after the thread has been fixed the flip flip #125 A is reset with the signal NTB ModeOP being reset hi responsive to a pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P Referring to Fig.

21 h, when the signal NTB Mode-OP goes 75 hi, the inverted signal NTB Mode-P then goes lo As shown in Fig 21 g, when the first positive pulse Needle Disengage PulseP is received at input 4 of NAND gate NA 55 C after the signal NTB Mode-P goes 80 lo, the lo pulse Start Run-N is formed, and the pulse trains are formed for the X and Y stepping motors to move the clamps Accordingly, at this point the program continues in its normal sequence, with the sig 85 nals associated with the Thread Break Sensor being in their normal condition.

* If for any reason the flip flop f 19 OA of Fig 21 f is configured with the clamps being raised during program control of the system, 90 resulting in a hi condition for the signal Clamp Mode-OP and a lo condition for the signal Clamp Mode-1 P, the system operates as follows As shown in Fig 211, the hi signal Clamp Mode-OP causes deenergization 95 of the main brake/clutch solenoid to slow and stop the machine if in the Stitch mode.

Also, as shown in Fig 21 g, the lo signal Clamp Mode-1 P prevents passage of the pulse Needle Disengage Pulse-P through 100 NAND gate NA 55 C and thus movement of the clamps by the stepping motors Finally, as shown in Fig 21 d, the hi signal Clamp Mode-OP prevents passage of a pulse formed by differentiator circuit 578 to pre 105 vent initiation of a new memory cycle The system may be restarted by the operator by closing the Reset Switch to initialize the system, as previously described in connection with Fig 21 b 110 In the complete specification of our copending patent Application No 27636/76 (Serial No 1,571,736) from which the present application is divided we have claimed an automatic sewing machine comprising 115 memory means having a plurality of randomly addressable storage locations, said storage locations holding information bits defining positional information along different coordinate directions on a work piece, 120 the locations being arranged in a plurality of separate data banks, address means for selecting said storage locations, selecting means for separately selecting any of said data banks holding the selected storage 125 locations at the start of a sewing sequence, information reading and signal generating means for reading information firm the selected data bank holding the selected storage locations and for generating signals 130 1,570,244 representing the read information, and stitch pattern forming means responsive to said signals for forming a stitch pattern in the work piece along the different coordinate directions.

Attention is also directed to the complete specifications of our copending patent Applications Nos 790703, 7902704, 7902705 and 7902709 which are also divided out of Application No 27636/76 (Serial No.

1,571,736).

Claims

WHAT WE CLAIM IS:-

1 An automatic sewing machine comprising a sewing needle, a work holder for holding a workpiece during sewing, driving means for moving the work holder relative to the needle, memory means having a plurality of randomly addressable storage locations holding data for positioning the work holder, address means for selecting said storage locations, means for generating a clock signal for forming a pulse train at a first frequency for sequencing said address means, and means responsive to said clock signal for forming a second pulse train at a second lower frequency for energizing the driving means.

W P THOMPSON & CO, Coopers Buildings, Church Street, Liverpool, L 1 3 AB.

Chartered Patent Agents.

Printed for Her Majesty's Stationery Office by Burgess & Son (Abingdon), Ltd -1980.

Published at The Patent Office, 25 Southampton Buildings, London, WC 2 A l AY, from which copies may be obtained.